2k16 cs6 chevrolet malibu limited 23179986a.ai 1 6/25/2015

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

2k16_CS6_Chevrolet_Malibu_Limited_23179986A.ai 1 6/25/2015 2:00:45 PM2k16_CS6_Chevrolet_Malibu_Limited_23179986A.ai 1 6/25/2015 2:00:45 PM

Chevrolet Malibu Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S/Canada-9086425) - 2016 - crc - 5/12/15

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 26

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 96

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 140

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 177

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 309

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 325

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 335

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem,MALIBU, and the MALIBU Emblemare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment that

was not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23179986 A First Printing ©2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along with

the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the ownermanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

g : First Responder

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


4 Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 12Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Passenger Sensing System . . . 13Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 14Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 16Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 19Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 19Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 21Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Universal Remote System . . . . . 22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 24Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 24Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 174.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 135.

Driver Information CenterButtons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 113.

3. Instrument Cluster 0 102.

Driver Information Center (DIC)0 113.

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 98.

5. Storage Area (If Equipped).See Instrument Panel Storage0 94.

6. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 134.

7. Infotainment 0 140.

8. CD Player 0 151.

9. Climate Control Systems0 168.

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 171.

10. Heated Front Seats 0 54 (IfEquipped).

11. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 203.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) 0 214 (If Equipped).

12. Power Outlets 0 100.

13. Parking Brake 0 201.

14. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 198.

15. Hazard Warning Flashers0 135.

16. Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 188 or IgnitionPositions (Key Access) 0 190.

17. Steering Wheel Controls 0 97.

18. Horn 0 98.

19. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 97.

20. Cruise Control 0 205.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 211 (If Equipped).

21. Hood Release. See Hood0 228.

22. Data Link Connector (Out ofView). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 107.

23. Storage Compartment. SeeInstrument Panel Storage 0 94.

24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 133.

Fog Lamps 0 136 (IfEquipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 136.


8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to 60 m(197 ft) away from the vehicle.

With Remote Start Shown

Press the button to extend the key.The key can be used for all locks.This key is also used for theignition, if the vehicle does not havepushbutton start.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

Y : Press and hold to open thetrunk.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. Press andhold for at least three seconds tosound the panic alarm. Press againto cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys 0 26 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.


In Brief 9

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 34.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors from theoutside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

. Use the key in the driver door.

To lock or unlock the doors from theinside:

. Press Q or K on the door lockswitch.

. Push the lock knob on the driverdoor to lock all doors. Push thelock knob on a passenger doorto lock only that door.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pulling thehandle again unlatches the door.

See Door Locks 0 35 or Power DoorLocks 0 36.

Windows

Press the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it.

The power windows only operatewith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 195.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-downfeature allow the window to belowered without holding the switch.


10 In Brief

If equipped, windows may also havean express-up feature. Pull awindow switch up or press it downall the way, release it, and thewindow goes up or downautomatically. Stop the window bypulling or pressing the switch in thesame direction a second time, or bybriefly operating the switch to thefirst detent in either direction.

See Power Windows 0 44.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch to raise or lower the seat.Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.

See Seat Adjustment 0 50.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 51.


In Brief 11

Lumbar Adjustment

If equipped, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 51.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 51.


12 In Brief

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the 1 and 2 buttons on theoutboard side of the driver seat areused to manually store and recallthe positions of the driver seat andoutside mirrors. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

The vehicle will also automaticallystore driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition is

placed in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions.

See Memory Seats 0 53 andVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

See Rear Seats 0 55.

Heated Seats

If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the engine must be running.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback. Indicator lights on thebutton show the current setting.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats 0 54.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints 0 49 and SeatAdjustment 0 50.


In Brief 13

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:

. Safety Belts 0 57.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 58.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 59.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 82.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 69.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 105.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

If equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, the mirror willautomatically reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror 0 44.


14 In Brief

Exterior Mirrors

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to (to deselect the mirror.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The interior lamps control in theoverhead console controls both thefront and rear interior lamps.

To operate, press the buttons:

E : Turns the lamps off.

1 : Turns the lamps on when anydoor is opened.

+ : Keeps the lamps on allthe time.


In Brief 15

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps in the overhead console andthe headliner.

Front Reading Lamps

Rear Reading Lamps

# or$ : Press the button neareach lamp to turn it on or off.

For more information, seeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 136.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel on the left side ofthe steering wheel.

O : Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released. Turn toO again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate once thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 133.

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 134.

. Fog Lamps 0 136.


16 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

INT : Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

nL : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 98.


In Brief 17

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Climate Control System

1. Fan Control

2. Air Conditioning or Comfort/Eco Air Conditioning

3. Air Delivery Modes

4. Defrost

5. Temperature Control

6. Heated Seats (If Equipped)

7. Rear Window Defogger

8. Recirculation


18 In Brief

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Air Conditioning or Comfort/Eco Air Conditioning


4. Defrost

5. SYNC



8. Fan Control

9. Recirculation

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Climate Control Systems 0 168or Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 171 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

DSC allows you to change gearssimilar to a manual transmission. Touse this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the top of the shiftlever to upshift, or press the −(minus) end of the button todownshift.

See Manual Mode 0 200.


In Brief 19

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND : Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or SiriusXM®,if equipped.

TUNE/MENU : Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

© SEEK ¨ : Press to seek theprevious or next station or track.

INFO : Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.

See Overview 0 141.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, vehicles with aSiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and avalid SiriusXM satellite radiosubscription can receive SiriusXMprogramming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:

. www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).

. www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio 0 148.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport in the center console. Externaldevices such as iPods®, laptopcomputers, MP3 players, and USBstorage devices may be connected.

See Auxiliary Devices 0 152.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) 0 158 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) 0 162 or Bluetooth(Overview) 0 157.


20 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

b / g : Press to interact withOnStar, Bluetooth, or navigation,if equipped.

$ /i : Press to mute. Pressagain to turn the sound on. Press toreject an incoming call, or to end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ : Use to select a radioband or audio source.

Use _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CDtrack, or MP3 track.

Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD.

Press and hold SRC to interact withthe navigation system, if equipped.

+ x − : Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls 0 97.

Cruise Control

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlon or off. A white indicator comeson in the instrument cluster.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume to that speed or hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET/− : Press the control downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

See Cruise Control 0 205.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.


In Brief 21

1. SET/CLR: Press to set,or press and hold to clear, themenu item displayed.

2. w / x : Use the band toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display theDIC menus. This button is alsoused to return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 113.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow a

vehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 211.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidunintentional lane departures atspeeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW light, @, is green if a lanemarking is detected. If the vehicledeparts the lane without using a turnsignal in that direction, the light willchange to amber and flash. Inaddition, beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 214.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectmoving vehicles in the next laneover in the vehicle's side blind zonearea. When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 212.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on thecenter stack display, when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 207.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system usesa triangle with an arrow displayedon the RVC screen to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may cross


22 In Brief

your vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound.

See “Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA)” under Rear Vision Camera(RVC) 0 207.

Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses sensors on the rearbumper to assist with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph) and usesaudible beeps to provide distanceand system information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Parking Assist 0 209.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets: one on the center stackbelow the climate control and oneunder the armrest inside the centerconsole storage.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

See Power Outlets 0 100.

Universal Remote System

If equipped, this system provides away to replace up to three remotecontrol transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be

helpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

See Universal Remote System0 129.

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches used to operate it are onthe headliner above the rearviewmirror. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) 0 188 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 190 and Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 195.


In Brief 23

Open/Close : Press and hold thefront or rear of the switch (1) to openor close the sunroof. The sunshadeautomatically opens with thesunroof, but must be closedmanually.

Express Open/Close : Press andrelease the front or rear of theswitch (1) to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

Vent/Close : Press and hold therear of the switch (2) to vent thesunroof. Press and hold the front ofthe switch to close.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

See Sunroof 0 46.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g on the center stack. iilluminates in the instrumentcluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon traction control.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe TCS/StabiliTrak button g on


24 In Brief

the center stack, until i and gilluminate in the instrumentcluster.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 203.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See

Vehicle Load Limits 0 184. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 270.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enterthe Vehicle Information Menu.Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough the menu items untilyou reach REMAININGOIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 233.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.


In Brief 25

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New Chevrolet owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance Program.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 329.


26 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 34Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 36Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 39Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Immobilizer Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Immobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 43Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 43Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 27

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

If the vehicle is equipped with akeyed ignition, the ignition key, keyrings, and RKE transmitter,if equipped, are designed to worktogether. As a system, it reducesthe risk of unintentionally movingthe key out of the RUN position.If replacements or additions arerequired, see your dealer. Limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.

The key that is part of the RKEtransmitter can be used for theignition and all locks if the vehicle isa Key Access vehicle. If the vehiclehas the keyless ignition, the key canbe used for the locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

If the vehicle has an ignition and itbecomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 329.



With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 339.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 335.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within range. See“Keyless Access Operation”following.

The transmitter functions may workup to 60 m (197 ft) away from thevehicle.

Other conditions, such as thosepreviously stated, can impact theperformance of the transmitter.

With Remote Start Shown

Q (Lock) : Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound on thesecond press to indicate locking.See Vehicle Personalization 0 123.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled throughvehicle personalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System0 39.

K (Unlock) : Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

The turn signal indicators may flashto indicate unlocking. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

Pressing K will disarm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System0 39.

Memory seat positions may berecalled when unlocking the vehicle.See Memory Seats 0 53 andVehicle Personalization 0 123.



Y (Remote Trunk Release) :Press and hold to open the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm) : Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash for about30 seconds until 7 is pressed againor the vehicle is started.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) : Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand release and then press andhold/ for at least four seconds tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 34.

The RKE transmitter buttons will notoperate when the key is in theignition.

Keyless Access Operation

If equipped, the Keyless Accesssystem allows the door and trunk tobe locked and unlocked withoutpressing the RKE transmitter button.The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the door being opened.If the vehicle has this feature, therewill be a button on the outside frontdoor handles.

The Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first unlock/lock button pressfrom the driver door. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the driver door handle, pressingthe lock/unlock button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the lock/unlock button ispressed again within five seconds,all passenger doors will unlock. Pullthe door handle to unlatch the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has openedand all doors are now closed.



Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromPassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on that doorhandle will unlock all doors.

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has openedand all doors are now closed.

Passive Locking

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

If equipped with Keyless Access,this feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors are

closed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior or noneremain in the interior.

Temporary Disable PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable the passivelocking by pressing and holding Kon the interior door switch with adoor open for at least four seconds,or until three chimes are heard.Passive locking will then remaindisabled until Q on the interior dooris pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see Vehicle Personalization0 123.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the touch pad on the trunkCenter High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) to open the trunk if theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the trunk.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Key Vehicles Only)

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the key to the ON/RUN position.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF,and remove the key.

3. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds.



The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeyVehicles Only)

U.S. owners are permitted toprogram a new key to their vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that Canadian owners seetheir dealer for programming newkeys when a recognized key is notavailable.

If there are no currently recognizedkeys available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The securitylight will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.


5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turnto ON/RUN; the key is learnedand all previously known keyswill no longer work with thevehicle.

Remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Key Vehicles Only).”

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the transmitterpocket. The transmitter pocketis inside the center consolestorage area.

2. Insert the vehicle key of thenew transmitter into the keylock cylinder on the outside ofthe driver door and turn the keyto the unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket.



4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ENGINE START/STOP button for 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters to beprogrammed must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder on the outside of thedriver door and turn the key tothe unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ENGINESTART/STOP button.

The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time, allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.

4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket, which isinside the center consolestorage area.

5. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.



When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the for 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

While trying to start the vehicle,if the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or USETRANSMITTER POCKET TOSTART. The REPLACE BATTERYIN REMOTE KEY message mayalso be displayed at this time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console andplace the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing the front of thevehicle.

2. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and press the ENGINESTART/STOP button. SeeStarting the Engine 0 192.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the DICindicates that battery replacement isnecessary. See Key and LockMessages 0 119.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Press the button on thetransmitter to extend the keyblade.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push thebattery down until it is held inplace. Replace with a CR2032or equivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.



Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows the engine to be startedfrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) : Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear windowdefogger may come on during aremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on during aremote start.

If the vehicle has heated seats, theymay come on during a remote start.See Heated Front Seats 0 54.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 28.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q.2. Immediately after completing

Step 1, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. Theturn signal lamps flashingconfirms the request to remotestart the vehicle has beenreceived.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. After 30 seconds,repeat the steps if a 10-minuteextension is desired. Remote startcan be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by another 10 minutes,if during the first 10 minutesSteps 1–2 are repeated while theengine is still running. An extensioncan be requested 30 seconds afterstarting. When the remote start isextended, the second 10 minuteperiod is added on to the first10 minutes for a total of 20 minutes.

The remote start can only beextended once.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.




. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:

. The key is in the ignition (KeyAccess) or if the key is in thevehicle (Keyless Access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

death from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock the doors from theoutside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

. Use the key in the driver door.

To lock or unlock the doors from theinside:

. Push down the manual lockknob to lock that door.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.



. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

Power Door Locks

Q (Lock) : Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock) : Press to unlock thedoors.

Locking or unlocking the doors willalso lock or unlock the trunk. SeeTrunk 0 38.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the actuallocking of the doors untilfive seconds after all doors areclosed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Unlocked Door AntiLockout feature has been turned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch with the door open,a chime will sound three timesindicating that delayed locking isactive.

The doors will then lockautomatically five seconds after alldoors are closed. If a door isreopened before five seconds haveelapsed, the five-second timer willreset once all the doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again, or press Q on the RKEtransmitter, to override this featureand lock the doors immediately.

Delayed locking can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on a door.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door unlocking can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Lockout ProtectionKeyed Ignition : When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the key in the ignition, all thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock.



This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Pushbutton Start : When lockingis requested with the driver dooropen and the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,all the doors will lock and then thedriver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Open/Unlocked Door Anti Lockout

If equipped with Keyless Access,Open/Unlocked Door Anti Lockout,when on, will unlock the driver doorif locking is requested while thedriver door is open. This feature can

be turned on or off using the vehiclepersonalization menus. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Manual Safety Locks

If equipped, the safety lock islocated on the inside edge of therear doors. To use the safety lock:

1. Insert the key into the safetylock slot and turn it so the slotis in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by activatingthe inside handle, by using thepower door lock switch, or byusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

2. Open the door from theoutside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open itfrom the outside.

2. Insert the key into the safetylock slot and turn it so the slotis in the vertical position. Dothe same for the other door.



Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, hatch/trunk open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thehatch/trunk or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or hatch/trunk open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 197.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk the vehicle mustbe off or the shift lever must be inP (Park).

. PressY on the RKEtransmitter when removed fromthe ignition.

. Press the touch pad on the rearof the trunk after unlocking alldoors.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the trunk may be opened while thevehicle is locked by pressing thetouch pad on the rear of the trunkwhile the RKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft) of the rear of the vehicle.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.



Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handle onthe trunk lid. This handle glowsfollowing exposure to light. Pull therelease handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

After use, return to the storedposition.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system:

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.



On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunkis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Close the trunk and the hood.Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem, if equipped.

. With a door open, press onthe inside Q.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash indicating thealarm system is operating.Pressing Q on the RKEtransmitter a second time will

bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

If a door, the hood, or the trunk isopened without first disarming thesystem, the turn signals will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

Do one of the following to disarmthe alarm system or turn off thealarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system,if equipped.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter or use theKeyless Access system,if equipped.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps andthe lights flash three times, an alarmoccurred previously while the alarmsystem was armed.



If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages 0 121.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 335.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key.

If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be damaged. See yourdealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispushed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

The security light on the instrumentcluster comes on when there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.



The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the vehicle does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter,or place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket. See “Starting theVehicle with a Low TransmitterBattery” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 28.

If the vehicle does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the transmitterpocket, your vehicle needs service.See your dealer who can servicethe theft-deterrent system and havea new transmitter programmed tothe vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe theft-deterrent system in thevehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9to deselect the mirror.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 171.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with the memorypackage, the outside mirrors have areverse tilt feature. This feature tiltsthe outside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driverto view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original position whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview 0 339.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a

pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 26.



Press the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it.

The power windows only operatewith the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 195.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-downfeature allow the window to belowered without holding the switch.If equipped, the driver window mayalso have an express-up feature.

Pull a window switch up or press itdown all the way, release it, and thewindow goes up or downautomatically. Stop the window bypressing or pulling the switch in thesame direction a second time, or bybriefly operating the switch to thefirst detent in either direction.

Safety Function

This is for vehicles with theexpress-up feature. If any object isin the path of the window when theexpress-up feature is active, thewindow will stop and auto-reverse toa preset position. Weatherconditions may cause the window toauto-reverse. The window switchmay be held up to the secondposition to close the window. Thewindow will return to normaloperation once the obstruction orcondition is removed.

Programming the PowerWindows

This is for vehicles with theexpress-up feature. If the battery onthe vehicle has been recharged ordisconnected, or is not working, the

windows will need to bereprogrammed for the express-upfeature to work. Beforereprogramming, replace or rechargethe vehicle's battery.

To program the driver window:

1. Close all doors, with theignition in ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or with RAPactive.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switchup until the window is fullyclosed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.



Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

PressZ on the driver door toactivate the window lockout. Theindicator light in the switch willilluminate.

PressZ again to deactivate thewindow lockout.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

The vehicle may have mirror lamps.The lamps turn on and off when thecover is opened and closed.

Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches used to operate it are onthe headliner above the rearviewmirror. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) 0 188 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 190 and Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 195.



Open/Close : Press and hold thefront or rear of the switch (1) to openor close the sunroof. The sunshadeautomatically opens with thesunroof, but must be closedmanually.

Express Open/Close : Press andrelease the front or rear of theswitch (1) to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

Vent/Close : Press and hold therear of the switch (2) to vent thesunroof. Press and hold the front ofthe switch to close.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


48 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 51Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 51Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 62Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 62Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 65When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Passenger Sensing System . . . 69Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 74

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 74Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Infants and Young Children . . . . 77Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 79Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 81Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 82

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Securing Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91


Seats and Restraints 49

Head Restraints

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seat

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button located on the sideof the head restraint and pull up orpush the head restraint down andrelease the button.

Pull and push on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Rear Seat

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.



To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see "Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System" under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 82.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch to raise or lower the seat.Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.



Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 51.

Lumbar Adjustment

If equipped, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.



Memory Seats

If available, the 1 and 2 buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall the positions of the driver seatand outside mirrors. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to as

RKE Memory positions. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outsidemirrors to the desired drivingpositions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and 1 at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using 2.

Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the Button Memorypositions, press and hold 1 or 2. Thedriver seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored tothose buttons when pressed.Releasing 1 or 2 before the storedpositions are reached stops therecall.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the power driver seatcontrol for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions

The RKE Memory feature can recallthe driver seat and outside mirrorsto previously stored RKE Memorypositions when entering the vehicle.

RKE transmitters are not labeledwith a number. If your memory seatposition is stored to "1" or "2," butthis position is not automaticallyrecalling, then change the storedposition or switch RKE transmitterswith the other driver.

Every time the ignition is placed inOFF, the positions of the driver seatand outside mirrors areautomatically stored to the RKEtransmitter that was used to startthe vehicle. These positions are



called RKE Memory positions andmay be different than the previouslymentioned Button Memory positionssaved to the 1 or 2 buttons.

To recall RKE Memory positions:

. On vehicles with RKE, press Kon the RKE transmitter and openthe driver door.

. On vehicles with KeylessAccess, press the lock/unlockbutton on the outside driver doorhandle and open the door. TheRKE transmitter must be presentfor the recall to activate.

. If the driver door is alreadyopen, press K on the RKEtransmitter to activate the recall.

The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization 0 123.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby opening the driver door andpressing the RKE transmitter Kbutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

To activate, place the ignition inOFF and open the driver door. If thedriver door is already open, placingthe ignition in OFF will activate therecall.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization 0 123.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory or power seatcontrols.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated Front Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



If available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the engine must be running.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback. Indicator lights on thebutton show the current setting.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights onthe button do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 34 andVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Lower the rear seat headrestraints completely. SeeHead Restraints 0 49.

2. Lift the rear seat armrest andplace it in the folded position,if necessary. See Rear SeatArmrest 0 57.



3. Make sure the outboard safetybelt is in the belt guide.

4. Pull on the lever on the top ofthe seatback to unlock it.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

5. Fold the seatback down.

Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward to lock it in place.Make sure the safety belt is inthe belt guide and is nottwisted or caught in theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

The center rear safety belt maylock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.



3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Rear Seat Armrest

The rear seat has an armrest in thecenter of the seatback. Lower thearmrest to access the twocupholders and the storage area.

To fold, lift the armrest up and pushit rearward until it is flush with theseatback.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 104.

Why Safety Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 75 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 77. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong



pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 62.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Always stow the safety belt slowly.If the safety belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull thesafety belt straight out firmly tounlock the webbing, and thenrelease it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Improper



shoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 58.

Press the release button and movethe height adjuster to the desiredposition. The adjuster can be movedup by pushing the slide/trim up.After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 63.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and for

some adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for the rearoutboard seating positions.Instructions are included with thecomfort guide.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 104.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care 0 62.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A knee airbag for the driver.

. A knee airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.



All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? 0 66.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The safety belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 75 orInfants and Young Children 0 77.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 105 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second rowseat-mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 63.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used to



predict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal impacts. Knee airbagsare not designed to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,or in many side impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location

of the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 65.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 66.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal, knee, andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 65.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not

prevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.



The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 336and Event Data Recorders0 337.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol for



on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 105.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.



. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 105.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areactive.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,

depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 105 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if the systemdetermines that an infant is present

in a child restraint. If a child restrainthas been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) 0 89 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) 0 91.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.



Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 49.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag(s) fora child in a child restraint dependingupon the child's size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers. Also, removelaptops, or other electronicdevices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two tothree minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 74for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:

. The passenger sensing systemmay turn off the passengerairbag(s) when liquid is soakedinto the seat. If this happens, theoff indicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on the

passenger airbag(s) while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerairbag(s) are turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105 for importantsafety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 334.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, safety belts,the airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, any of the airbag modules,ceiling or pillar garnish trim, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GM

covers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 69.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 277 for additionalimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any other

reason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 327.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 65. See your dealerfor service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 59. If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 59.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neither

the vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, the

restraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.



{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 82. Children canbe endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions are

important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.



Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 69 for additional information.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if the



child restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCH

attachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the

child restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments. In thiscase, the safety belt must be used(with top tether where available) tosecure the child restraint. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) 0 89 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)0 91.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor) : Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.



H (Lower Anchor) : Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child

restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 81 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it is

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 81.

You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in the rightrear seating position, and install theother one either in the left rearseating position or in the centerseating position. If you need toinstall child restraints in both thecenter and left rear seatingpositions, the one in the centerseating position will need to besecured using the vehicle safetybelts instead of the LATCH anchors.



Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.

There are five lower LATCH anchorsin the rear seat.

. Use anchors 1 and 2 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in the right rear seatingposition.

. Use anchors 3 and 4 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in the center rear seatingposition.

. Use anchors 4 and 5 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in left rear seatingposition.

Installing child restraints usingLATCH in the center and left rearseating positions at the same time isprohibited.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, the headrestraint may be removed.See “Head RestraintRemoval andReinstallation” at the endof this section.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.



Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tether

under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There should



be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats 0 55for additional information.

2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the sametime, and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches on theposts must face the driver sideof the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints 0 49.

3. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is locked inplace.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 82 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 82 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 81.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation ofthe child restraint, the headrestraint may be removed. See“Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 82.



2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.


4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 82.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 82.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 81.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag under certainconditions. See Passenger SensingSystem 0 69 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 105 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 69 for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 82 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag, the offindicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator 0 105.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.




5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 69.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


94 Storage

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . 94Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . 94Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Center Console Storage . . . . . . . 95

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Pull the door down to access.

Uplevel

The vehicle may have a storagearea behind the radio display. Slidethe button to the right and release;the door automatically opens.

Keep the storage area closed whennot in use.

Push the door down to close.

Glove BoxPull the handle up to open.


Storage 95

Cupholders

Rear Seat

Lower the armrest to access thecupholders. There is also storage inthe armrest; lift the lid to access.

Center Console Storage

The center console has storageunder the armrest. Pull up the latchand lift to open.

If equipped, there is an auxiliaryinput jack, USB port, and poweroutlet. There is an opening underthe armrest on the passenger sidefor cord access.

See Auxiliary Devices 0 152 andPower Outlets 0 100. See theinfotainment manual.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-DownsThere are cargo tie‐downs in thetrunk. The cargo tie‐downs can beused to secure small loads or theconvenience net. See ConvenienceNet 0 95.

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience net,it is in the trunk and used to storesmall loads. The net should not beused to store heavy loads. Attachthe loops on each side of the net tothe cargo tie-downs in the trunk.See Cargo Tie-Downs 0 95.


96 Instruments and Controls

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 97Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 97Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 98Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 104Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 105Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 106

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 107

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 110Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . 110Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 111Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . 111Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 112Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 112Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 112Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . 113Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 113Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Information DisplaysCenter Stack Display . . . . . . . . . 113Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Brake System Messages . . . . . 117Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . 117Cruise Control Messages . . . . . 117Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 117Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 118Engine Power Messages . . . . . 119Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 119Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . 119Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 121Service Vehicle Messages . . . . 121Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Transmission Messages . . . . . . 122Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . 122Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 123

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 129


Instruments and Controls 97

Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g (Press to Talk) : For vehicleswith an OnStar, Bluetooth,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Infotainment Controls)0 158 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) 0 162 or Bluetooth(Overview) 0 157 and OnStarOverview 0 339.



$ /i (Mute/End Call) : Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or to end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Thumbwheel Control) :Use this control to select a radioband or audio source.

Use _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CDtrack or MP3 track.

Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD.

Press and hold SRC to interact withthe navigation system, if equipped.

+ x − (Volume) : Press + toincrease the volume; press − todecrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

INT (Intermittent Wipes) : Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X (Mist) : For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

nL (Windshield Washer) : Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray washer fluid andactivate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached. When the lever isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had been



activated. See Washer Fluid 0 240for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 245.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are on LO, HI, or INT, theywill immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the center stack. Thecompass receives its heading andother information from the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages 0 117 for the messagesthat may be displayed for thecompass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. The clock menu can only

be used with the radio on while inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.See Overview 0 141 for informationabout how to use the menu system.For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the navigation manual.

Setting the Clock (Radiowith CD)

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings.

2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the next number.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK / button at any timeor press the TUNE/MENU knobafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings.

2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.



3. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Clock (Radio withTouchscreen)

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options. Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to scrollthrough the available setupfeatures. Press the TUNE/MENU knob or press the Timescreen button to display otheroptions within that feature.

2. Press + or − to increase ordecrease the Hours andMinutes displayed on the clock.

To turn Auto Set on and off, pressthe Auto Set button.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

12/24 HR Format : Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day − : Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display : Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

The accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets: one on the center stackbelow the climate control system,and one under the armrest insidethe center console storage.

The outlet is powered when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 195.

Open the protective cover to use theaccessory power outlet.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlets and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If there is a problem, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 224.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

If equipped with this power outlet itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.



The power outlet is on the rear ofthe center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onif the ignition is in LOCK/OFF, noequipment is plugged into the outlet,or if the equipment is plugged, butnot fully seated in the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, the equipment may

operate briefly then turn off.A protection circuit shuts off thepower supply and the indicator lightturns off. To reset the circuit, unplugthe item and plug it back in or turnthe Retained Accessory Power(RAP) off and then back on. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 195. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps.

. Medical equipment.

See High Voltage Devices andWiring 0 254.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 113.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

For vehicles with the Stop/Startsystem, when the ignition is in ON/RUN, the tachometer indicates the

vehicle status. When pointing toAUTO STOP, the engine is off butthe vehicle is on and can move. Theengine could auto start at any time.When the indicator points to OFF,the vehicle is off.

When the engine is on, thetachometer will indicate the engine’srevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm’s, during auto stopmode, when the engine is shuttingoff and restarting.

A slight bump may be felt when thetransmission is determining themost fuel efficient operating range.

Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank. When the indicatornears empty, a message in theDriver Information Center (DIC)displays. See Fuel SystemMessages 0 119. The vehicle stillhas a little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be fueled soon. An arrow onthe fuel gauge indicates the side ofthe vehicle the fuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. These arenormal and do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:



. At the service station, the gaspump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thefuel tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or lessthan half the fuel tank's capacityto fill it.

. The indicator moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge, the engine istoo hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 69.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,

grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 63.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 69. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.



United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol, to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the front

outboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag are allowed toinflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 105 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. This light couldindicate that there are problems witha generator drive belt, or that thereis an electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.



Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inON/RUN with the engine notrunning for Key Access or in ServiceOnly Mode for Keyless Access. SeeIgnition Positions (Keyless Access)0 188 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) 0 190.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 227.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow theprevious guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 217. A few



driving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 216.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 224. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNwith the engine not running forKey Access or in Service OnlyMode for Keyless Access.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recently

been replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English



This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does not

have antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light0 108.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages 0 117 for allbrake-related DIC messages.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

If equipped, this light comes onbriefly while starting the vehicle.

If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced.

This light is green if LDW is on andready to operate.

This light changes to amber andflashes to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed withoutusing a turn signal in that direction.



See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 214.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 211.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.



If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages 0 121.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressure0 268.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 271.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.



If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) 0 41 or ImmobilizerOperation (Keyless Access) 0 41.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 133.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 136.



Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 133.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl 0 205.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when adoor is open or not securely latched.

Before driving, check that all doorsare properly closed.

Information Displays

Center Stack DisplayInfotainment and vehiclepersonalization information displaysin the center stack screen. See:

. The navigation system manualand Infotainment 0 140.

. Vehicle Personalization 0 123.

The center stack controls only needa light touch to operate and workbest with bare hands. The controlswill work with most gloves althoughthey may take longer to respond.Use the finger pad rather than thefinger tip to minimize response time.If the controls are not responding,remove the gloves.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutthe vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem is



detected. See Vehicle Messages0 116. All messages appear in theDIC display in the center of theinstrument cluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displays,which can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leverto the left of the steering wheel. TheDIC displays trip, fuel, vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item displayed.

2. w /x (Band): Use the bandto scroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display theTrip/Fuel menu and the VehicleInformation menu. This buttonis also used to return to or exitthe last screen displayed onthe DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel Menu isdisplayed. Usew /x to scrollthrough the menu items. Thefollowing is the list of all possibletrip/fuel displays. Some of the itemsmay not be available for yourparticular vehicle.

. Digital Speedometer

. Trip 1

. Trip 2

. Fuel Range

. Average Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy

. Average Vehicle Speed

. Timer

. Navigation

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.



Average Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).This number is calculated based onthe number of L/100 km (mpg)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. This numberreflects only the approximateaverage fuel economy that thevehicle has right now, and willchange as driving conditionschange. The fuel economy can bereset by pressing SET/CLR whilethe Average Fuel Economy displayis showing.

The instantaneous fuel economydisplay shows the currentapproximate fuel economy in litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). Unlikeaverage economy, this displaycannot be reset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average is

calculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Navigation

This display is used for theTurn-by-Turn Navigation,if equipped.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information menuis displayed. Usew /x to scrollthrough the menu items. Thefollowing is the list of all possiblevehicle information displays. Someof the items may not be available foryour particular vehicle.

. Display Units

. Tire Pressure

. Remaining Oil Life

. Battery

Display Units

Movew /x to switch betweenmetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayed



in either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System 0 270 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 271.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If Remaining Oil Life 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages 0 118.The oil should changed as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil 0 231. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 310.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset the

engine oil life system, press SET/CLR while the Oil Life display isactive. See Engine Oil Life System0 233.

Battery

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts. Thevehicle's charging system regulatesvoltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Light0 106. If there is a problem with thebattery charging system, the DICwill display a message.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Battery -North America 0 242.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid 0 241.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass 0 99.

– –

Dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl 0 205.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.



RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolant0 236.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When the engine oil is changed, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System 0 233,Driver Information Center (DIC)0 113, Engine Oil 0 231, andMaintenance Schedule 0 310.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

OIL PRESSURE LOW— STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.



Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with Keyless Access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. See “BatteryReplacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

USE TRANSMITTER POCKETTO START

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROLON/OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on or off. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 134.

CHECK XXX TURNSIGNAL LAMP

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement 0 246 andReplacement Bulbs 0 253.



TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

If your vehicle has the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system, thismessage may display if the FCAsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 211.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled because thecamera view is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. To clean the system,

clean the outside of the windshieldarea in front of the LDW/FCAcamera sensor.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

This message may appear if LDWdoes not activate due to atemporary condition.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theparking assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled. See ParkingAssist 0 209.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled and needservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system. Do not use

this system to help you park. SeeParking Assist 0 209. See yourdealer for service.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message appears, the systemneeds service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the system off.

SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that theSBZA system is disabled becausethe sensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in the blind zone.The sensor may be blocked by mud,dirt, snow, ice, or slush. Thismessage may also activate duringheavy rain or due to road spray. Thevehicle does not need service.



Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.If this message appears, try to resetthe system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then startthe engine again. If this messagestill comes on, it means there is aproblem. See your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays and a chimemay sound when there may be aproblem with the power steeringsystem. If this message displaysand a reduction in steeringperformance or loss of powersteering assistance is noticed, seeyour dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation 0 271.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 271.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light 0 111.

If a tire pressure message displays,inflate the tires until the tire pressureis equal to the values shown on theTire and Loading Information label.



See Tires 0 261, Vehicle LoadLimits 0 184, and Tire Pressure0 268.

More than one tire pressuremessage can be received at a time.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 113.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT DENIED

This message displays whenattempting to use the automatictransmission manual mode to shiftto too low or too high of a gear. SeeManual Mode 0 200.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenturning the ignition off or removingthe key from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer reservoir assoon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 230 for

the location of the windshieldwasher reservoir. Also, see WasherFluid 0 240 for more information.

Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/PASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to program each front windowfor the express-up feature to work.See Power Windows 0 44.



VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Infotainment System AudioSystem Controls

Using the Faceplate

TUNE/MENU Knob

. Press to enter, select, or activatea highlighted menu option.

. Turn to highlight a menu option.

. Press to enable or disable asystem setting.

} BACK

. Press to exit a menu.

. Press to return to a previousscreen.

Using the Touch Screen

Press a screen feature to:

. View more feature options.

. Enable or disable the feature.

w : Press to scroll up.

x : Press to scroll down.

Back : Press to return to theprevious menu.

To access thepersonalization menu:

1. Press Config on the Homepage on the infotainmentsystem display or CONFIG onthe faceplate.

2. Select the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

3. Select the desired featuresetting.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Languages

. Time and Date

. Radio Settings

. Phone Settings

. Navigation Settings

. Display Settings

. Vehicle Settings

Each menu is detailed in thefollowing information.

Languages

Select Languages, then select fromthe available language(s).

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 99.

Radio Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Auto Volume

. Gracenote Options

. XM Channel Art

. Max Startup Volume

. Number of Favorites Pages

. XM Categories

. Software Versions Menu



Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volume tominimize the effects of unwantedbackground noise that can resultfrom changing road surfaces, drivingspeeds, or open windows. Thisfeature works best at lower volumesettings where background noise istypically louder than the soundsystem volume.

Select Off, Low, Medium, or High.

Gracenote Options


. Normalization

Normalization

This feature improves voicerecognition and media groupings.See “CD Player,” “USB,” “AuxiliaryDevices,” and “Bluetooth Audio” inthe infotainment manual.

Select to enable or disable.

XM Channel Art

This feature turns the XM Audiopage background on the XMChannel display on and off.

Select to enable or disable.

Max Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level.

Press + or − to increase ordecrease the volume.

Number of Favorites Pages

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number.

XM Categories

This allows which available XMCategories are used and displayed.

Press to enable or disable availablecategories.

Software Versions Menu

Press to display information aboutthe system and update software ifavailable.

Phone Settings


. Bluetooth

Bluetooth


. Device List

. Pair Device

Device List

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Pair Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing a Phone/Device” in“Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Navigation Settings

See “Navigation Settings” in“Configure Menu” in theinfotainment manual.



Display Settings

Press and the following maydisplay:

. Home Page Menu

. Rear Camera Options

. Display Off

. Map Settings

Home Page Menu


. Customize

. Sort

. Restore Home Page Defaults

Customize

This feature allows the selection ofwhat icons will be on the firstHome Page.

Select and follow the screenprompts.

Sort

This feature allows the icons on theHome Page to be moved.


Restore Home Page Defaults

This feature will restore the HomePage to the factory settings.


Rear Camera Options


. Symbols

. Guiding Lines

Symbols

Select to turn the rear camerasymbols on or off. See Rear VisionCamera (RVC) 0 207.

Guiding Lines

Select to turn the rear cameraguiding lines on or off. See RearVision Camera (RVC) 0 207.

Display Off

Press to turn the display off. Thedisplay will return when any radiobuttons are pressed or the screen istouched (if equipped).

Map Settings

See “Map Settings” in “ConfigureMenu” in the infotainment manual.

Vehicle Settings


. Climate and Air Quality

. Comfort and Convenience

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

. Return to Factory Settings?

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Remote Start Heated Seats



. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This allows for selecting theautomatic fan speed. It can beadjusted to run lower or higher thannormal.

Select High, Medium, or Low.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When turned on, this feature willturn the heated seats on when usingremote start on cold days.

Select On or Off.

Auto Defog

Only vehicles with dual automaticclimate control will have this option.This allows for turning the autodefog on or off.

Select On or Off.

Auto Rear Defog

This will allow for turning the autorear defog on or off. This feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when it is coldoutside.

Select On or Off.

Comfort and Convenience


. Easy Exit Driver Seat

. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” underMemory Seats 0 53.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows selection of the chimevolume level.

Select Normal or High.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.

They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned to OFF, or thevehicle is left in R (Reverse). SeeReverse Tilt Mirrors 0 43.

Select On or Off.

Collision/Detection Systems


. Park Assist

. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Park Assist

This allows the Park Assist featureto be turned on or off.

Select On or Off.

See Parking Assist 0 209.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

This allows the SBZA feature to beturned on or off.

Select On or Off.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 212.



Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off or On.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 207.

Lighting


. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off. The vehiclelocator lights come on whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows for selecting how longthe exterior lamps stay on whenleaving the vehicle and it is darkoutside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes.

Power Door Locks

Select and depending on the radiothe following may display:

. Open Door Anti Lock Out

. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out orUnlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Select to turn On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door is

closed. Three chimes will signaldelayed locking is in use. Presseither the power lock button or Q onthe RKE transmitter twice tooverride the delayed locking featureand immediately lock all of thedoors.

Select to turn On or Off.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select and depending on the radiothe following may display:

. Remote Unlock Feedback

. Unlock Feedback (Lights)

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Locking Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Door Unlock Options

. Memory Remote Recall

. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

. Relock Remote Door

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock



Remote Unlock Feedback orUnlock Feedback (Lights)

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select On or Off. Press TUNE/MENU to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Lock Feedback orLocking Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press TUNE/MENU when LockingFeedback is highlighted. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to select Lightsand Horn, Lights Only, Horn Only,or Off. Press TUNE/MENU toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Door Unlock or DoorUnlock Options

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press TUNE/MENU when DoorUnlock Options is highlighted. Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to select AllDoors or Driver Door Only. Whenset to Driver Door Only, the driverdoor will unlock the first time K ispressed and all doors will unlockwhen K is pressed a second time.When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock at the first press ofK. Press TUNE/MENU to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

When on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's last seat and outsidemirror positions upon unlocking thedriver door with the RKE transmitter,and opening that door. The currentdriver is identified when the RKEtransmitter is used to unlock thedriver door. If equipped with KeylessAccess, the recall will occur uponopening the driver door. See“Recalling RKE Memory Positions”under Memory Seats 0 53.

Press TUNE/MENU when MemoryRemote Recall is highlighted. Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to select Onor Off. Press TUNE/MENU toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

This allows the Remote Left inVehicle Reminder feature to beturned on or off. If on, the horn willchirp if a remote is left in thevehicle.

Press TUNE/MENU when RemoteLeft in Vehicle Reminder ishighlighted. Turn the TUNE/MENUknob to select On or Off. PressTUNE/MENU to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Relock Remote Door

When on, the doors willautomatically lock after a period oftime if the vehicle is not entered orexited.

Press TUNE/MENU when RelockRemote Door is highlighted. Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to select On



or Off. Press TUNE/MENU toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorsare unlocked by pressing the buttonon the outside door handle.

Press TUNE/MENU when PassiveDoor Unlock is highlighted. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to select AllDoors or Driver Door. Press TUNE/MENU to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Lock

This allows for turning PassiveLocking off, on, or on with feedback.

Press TUNE/MENU when PassiveDoor Lock is highlighted. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to select Off, On,or On with Active Horn Chirp. PressTUNE/MENU to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings?

Select Return to Factory Settings?for the option to return all vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the TUNE/MENUknob to select Yes or No. PressTUNE/MENU to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 335.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop and



reverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Donot release either button until

the indicator light changes froma slow to a rapid flash. Thenrelease both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals forCanada and Some GateOperators” later in this section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed button



for five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for two seconds andthen release it. If the garagedoor does not move or thelamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does notmove or the garage door lampdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming helpcall 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.



Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


Lighting 133

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 133Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 135Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Battery Load Management . . . 138

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel on the left side ofthe steering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O (Off) : Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to O again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO (Automatic) : Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps) : Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger) : Push the turn signallever away from you and release, toturn the high beams on. To return tolow beams, push the lever again orpull it toward you and release.


134 Lighting

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever toward you, andrelease.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system turns on thelow-beam headlamps at a reducedbrightness. For vehicles with HighIntensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, there is a dedicated

DRL. The DRL will come on whenall of the following conditionsare met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to O or theignition is off.

This vehicle may have a DRLdisabling function. When the DRLare on and a turn signal is activated,the DRL on that side will be off untilthe turn signal goes off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


Lighting 135

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers) :Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn signal can be turned offmanually by moving the lever backto its original position.


136 Lighting

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses 0 254.

Fog Lamps

To turn on the fog lamps,if equipped, the ignition and theheadlamps or parking lamps mustbe on.

If the fog lamps are turned on whilethe exterior lamp control is in theAUTO position, the headlampscome on automatically.

# (Fog Lamps, If Equipped) :Press to turn on or off. An indicatorlight on the instrument clustercomes on when the fog lampsare on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination) : Move and hold thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is in thedoor position.


Lighting 137

Dome Lamps

The interior lamps control in theoverhead console controls both thefront and rear interior lamps.

To operate, press the buttons:

E (Off) : Turns the lamps off.

1 (Door) : Turns the lamps onwhen any door is opened.

+ (On) : Keeps the lamps on allthe time.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps in the overhead console andthe headliner.

Front Reading Lamps

Rear Reading Lamps

# or$ (Reading Lamps) : Pressthe button near each lamp to turn iton or off.


138 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and most ofthe interior lights turn on brieflywhen the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter K button ispressed. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off, then thedome lamps and remaining interiorlights dim to off. Entry lighting canbe disabled manually by changingthe ignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the RKE transmitterQ button.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps come on atnight, or in areas with limitedlighting, when the key is removedfrom the ignition. The dome lampsalso come on when the key isremoved from the ignition. Theexterior lamps and dome lamps

remain on after the door is closedfor a set amount of time, thenautomatically turn off.

For vehicles with Keyless Access,the exterior lamps automatically turnon when a door is opened after theignition is changed to the OFFposition. The dome lamps alsocome on after the ignition ischanged to the OFF position. SeeIgnition Positions (Keyless Access)0 188 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) 0 190.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltage display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), you maysee the voltage move up or down.This is normal. If there is a problem,an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.


Lighting 139

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 117.


140 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 141Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 150Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 150

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . . 157Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with these features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling somefunctions when driving. These

functions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:

. Become familiar with theoperation, faceplate buttons, andscreen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving 0 178.

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 195.


Infotainment System 141

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview

Infotainment System Overview

Radio faceplate examples areprovided to help identify buttons andto help understand the functions ofthe radio. Find the faceplate thatbest matches the vehicle for adescription. Radio with CD

1. VOL/ O (Volume/Power)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

2. FAV (Favorites)

. Opens the favorites list.

3. CD/AUX

. Selects the CD player orexternal audio source.

. Selects a connectedexternal audio source.

4. Buttons 1 to 6

. Saves and selects favoritestations.

5. RADIO/BAND

. Changes the band whilelistening to the radio.



. Selects the radio whenlistening to a different audiosource.

6. BACK /. Menu: Moves one

level back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

7. TUNE/MENU

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

8. INFO

. Radio: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

9. TONE

. Press to access the ToneSettings menu to adjustbass, midrange, and treble.See Operation 0 143.

10. CONFIG (Configuration)

. Opens theConfiguration menu.

11. © SEEK ¨

. Press © to seek to thebeginning of the current orprevious track. If the trackhas been playing for lessthan five seconds, it seeksthe previous track. If longerthan five seconds, thecurrent track starts from thebeginning.

. Press and hold © to quicklyreverse through a track.Release the button to returnto playing speed. See CDPlayer 0 151.

. For AM or FM, press © toseek to the previous strongstation.

. Press ¨ to seek the nexttrack.

. Press and hold ¨ to fastforward through a track.

. Release ¨ to return toplaying speed. See CDPlayer 0 151.

. For AM or FM, press ¨ toseek to the next strongstation.

12. CD Slot

. Insert a CD.

13. w j (Play/Pause). Press to start, pause, and

resume playback. See CDPlayer 0 151.

14. v / > (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the Phone menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

15. Z (CD Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

Configuration Setup Menu

Press the CONFIG button to displaythe Configuration menu. TheConfiguration menu is used for



changing the settings for the audio,phone, vehicle configuration, andtime features.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to scrollthrough the available setup features.Once the desired feature displays,press the TUNE/MENU knob orpress the desired feature on thescreen, to display more optionswithin that feature.

Languages

To change the display language,see Vehicle Personalization 0 123.

The vehicle supports English,French, and Spanish. The defaultlanguage is English.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/ O (Volume/Power) : Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/ O (Volume/Power) : Turn toadjust the volume.

v / > (Phone) : For vehicles withOnStar, press and hold v / > tomute the infotainment system. Pressand hold v / > again, or turn the

VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar®, pressv / > to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press v / > again, or turn

the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The TUNE/MENU knob and theBACK / button are used tonavigate the menu system.

TUNE/MENU : Press to:

. Select or activate the highlightedmenu option.

. Confirm a set value.

. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:

. Enter the menu system.

. Highlight a menu option.

. Select a value.

BACK / : Press to:

. Exit a menu.

. Return from a submenu screento the previous menu screen.

. Delete the last character in asequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

The base radio displays one line oftext at a time.



1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press TUNE/MENU to selectthe highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press TUNE/MENU to activatethe setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press TUNE/MENU to confirmthe setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press TUNE/MENU to turn thefunction on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press TUNE/MENU to selectthe character.

Press the BACK / button to deletethe last character in the sequenceor press and hold to delete theentire character sequence.



Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold TUNE/MENUuntil the value changes to 0.

Press the BACK / button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Speed Compensated Volume

The Speed Compensated Volumefeature automatically adjusts theradio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise as the vehiclespeeds up or slows down, so thatthe volume level is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Speed compensatedvolume.


5. Press BACK / button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:



3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the BACK / button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Regionalization

RDS stations will broadcast differentprograms on different frequencies.To set the Regional (REG) featureon or off:


2. Select Regional (REG).

3. Select On or Off.

4. Press BACK / to go back tothe previous menu.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND : Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, or SiriusXM if equipped.

TUNE/MENU : Press and turn tonavigate the available menus. Turnto manually change stations.

INFO : Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

© SEEK ¨ : Press to search forstations.

FAV : Press to open thefavorites list.

1 to 6 : Press to select presetstations.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS

information. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AM,FM, or SiriusXM if equipped.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to openthe main radio menu for thatfrequency.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or SiriusXM ifequipped. The last station that wasplaying starts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly press © or ¨ to automaticallysearch for the next available station.If a station is not found, the radioswitches to a more sensitive searchlevel. If a station still is not found,the frequency that was last activebegins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and hold © or ¨ until thestation on the display is reached,then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List.All receivable stations in thecurrent reception area are



displayed. If a station list hasnot been created, an automaticstation search is done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A listof all programming typesavailable displays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FMStation List, if the stationsstored in the station list are nolonger received. A stationsearch will be completed andthe first station in the updatedlist will play.

To cancel the station search, pressTUNE/MENU.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

Satellite Radio

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

If equipped, vehicles with aSiriusXM satellite radio tuner and aSiriusXM satellite radio subscriptioncan receive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. For moreinformation, see www.siriusxm.comor 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).



When SiriusXM is active, thechannel name and number,category name, song title, and artistdisplay on the screen.

SiriusXM Categories

SiriusXM channels are organized incategories.

To customize which SiriusXMcategories are used and displayedin the system, see “Adding orRemoving SiriusXM Categories”following.

Adding or Removing SiriusXMCategories

1. Press the CONFIG button onthe faceplate.


3. Select Add/Remove XMCategories.

4. From the Add/Remove XMCategories screen, select ordeselect any category to beused in XM mode.A checkmark will indicate thatthe category is selected.

Turning SiriusXM ChannelGraphic On or Off

1. Press the CONFIG button onthe faceplate.


3. Select XM Channel Graphic toturn on or off.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,

especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

If equipped, SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service provides digital radioreception. Tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.



Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference with theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger in therear window. Do not scratch theinside surface or damage the linesin the glass. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If attaching a cell phone antenna tothe glass, attach it between the gridlines.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Caution

Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. Themetallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for OnStar, the SiriusXMSatellite Radio Service System, andGPS (Global Positioning System),if the vehicle has these features.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it isopen, reception can also beaffected.



Audio Players

CD PlayerThe player can be used for CDsand MP3s.

With the ignition on, insert a CD intothe slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in and begins playing.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) forvideo to display.

The system is capable of playing:

. Most audio CDs

. CD-R

. CD-RW

. MP3 or unprotected WMAformats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music or video that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

To avoid damage to the CD player:

. Do not use scratched ordamaged discs.

. Do not apply labels to discs. Thelabels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the disc using amarking pen.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot. Theplayer pulls it in the rest of theway. If the disc is damaged orimproperly loaded, there is anerror and the disc ejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressZ to eject a disc from theCD player.

Playing an Audio CD

CD/AUX : Press to use the CDplayer.

w j (Play/Pause) : Use to start,pause, or resume play.

© SEEK ¨:. Press © to seek to the beginning

of the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeksthe previous track. If longer thanfive seconds, the current trackstarts from the beginning.

. Press and hold © to quicklyreverse through a track. Releasethe button to return to playingspeed.

. For AM or FM, press © to seekto the previous strong station.

. Press ¨ to seek the next track.

. Press and hold ¨ to fast forwardthrough a track.

. Release ¨ to return to playingspeed.



TUNE/MENU : Turn to the right orleft to select the next or previoustrack. Press this knob to select themenu. If a track is selected from thelist, the system plays the track andreturns to the CD screen.

Error Messages

If Disc Read Error displays and/orthe disc comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

. The disc has an invalid orunknown format.

. The disc is not from a correctregion.

. The disc is very hot. Try the discagain when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput jack and USB port in thecenter console. See Center ConsoleStorage 0 95.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOverview 0 141.

Keep the storage area closed whennot in use.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Possible auxiliary audio sourcesinclude:

. Laptop computer

. MP3 player

. Tape player

This jack is not an audio output. Donot plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Auxiliarydevices should be set up while thevehicle is in P (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack. When a deviceis connected, the systemautomatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, press theCD/AUX button on the radiofaceplate, then press SOURCErepeatedly to cycle through all of theavailable audio source screens, untilthe AUX source screen is selected.

USB Port

The following devices may beconnected and controlled by theinfotainment system.

. iPods®

. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)

. USB Drives



. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port inthe center console.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres

. Audiobooks

. Composers

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts,Genres, Audiobooks,or Composers.

4. Select the track.

Shuffle

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the BACK / buttonto return to the main screen.

On : Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off : Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press theBACK / button to return to the mainscreen.

On : Repeats the current track.

Off : Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port in the center console.



. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.




Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On : Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off : Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On : Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off : Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to the USBport in the center console.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.


. Playlists*

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On : Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off : Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On : Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off : Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.



Connecting a Bluetooth®

Device

Before a Bluetooth device can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem, it must first be paired to thesystem. Bluetooth pairing to theinfotainment system may not besupported in all vehicles and not allBluetooth devices can be paired tothe infotainment system. Beforepairing the Bluetooth device,become familiar with its user guidefor Bluetooth functions. The systemonly connects to Bluetooth devicesthat support A2DP (Advanced AudioDistribution Profile) version 1.2.

A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired to thevehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.

Pairing Information:

. Up to five devices can be pairedto the system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. The infotainment systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired device in theorder the device was paired.

. Only one paired device can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the device isdeleted.

Bluetooth Setup Menu

The Bluetooth Setup menu can beaccessed with or without a deviceattached to the USB port.

To select the Bluetooth Setup menuwhen a device is attached to theUSB port and active:

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobwhile in the iPod, Zune, PFD,or USB device main menu.

2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.

To select the Bluetooth Music Setupmenu when a device is not attachedto the USB port, or when a device isattached to the USB port but notactive:

1. Press the CD/AUX button untilAUX is the active source.



To select the Bluetooth Music Setupmenu when a Bluetooth device isconnected and active:



Pairing a Device

1. Select Connect To New Devicefrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. The system asks a series ofYes/No questions to determinewhat type of device is beingpaired.



3. After the system determineswhat type of Bluetooth deviceis being paired, the Bluetoothdevice will need to be put intodiscovery mode.

4. Some devices may require aPersonal Identification Number(PIN) in order to complete thepairing process. Locate thedevice named“GMusicConnect” in the list onthe Bluetooth device and followthe instructions on the deviceto enter the four-digit PINprovided by the infotainmentsystem.

Connecting to a Device

Once a device is paired to theinfotainment system, it can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem.

To connect a paired device when noother device is connected to theinfotainment system:

1. Select the Select Device optionfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the new device.

To connect a paired device whenanother device is connected to theinfotainment system:

1. Select the Select Device optionfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the new device.

3. The active device isdisconnected from the systemand the new device isconnected.

Removing a Device

1. Select Remove Device fromthe Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the device.

3. The device is removed fromthe system.

Before connecting to the removeddevice again, it will need to pairedto the infotainment system.

Changing the Default PIN

To change the default PIN:

1. Select Change Default PINfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select one of the pre-definedPINs, or select Other to createa PIN.

To create a PIN:

1. Select the length of the PIN.

2. Enter the character sequence.

Messages

The following messages mayappear on the infotainment screen.

Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality :This message displays when theBluetooth signal strength is low.

This Feature is Unavailable WhileVehicle is Moving : This messagedisplays when an action is notallowed while the vehicle is moving.

Controlling a Bluetooth Device

Bluetooth devices that supportAVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) version 1.0 may beable to be controlled by theinfotainment system. Control of aBluetooth device by the infotainmentsystem may not be supported in allvehicles.



Press and release © or ¨ to skiptracks.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voice



recognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the infotainmentsystem and the steering wheel tooperate the Bluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call) : Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

To navigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, seeOverview 0 141.

v / > (Phone/Mute) : Press toenter the Phone main menu.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise : The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak : A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak : Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 335.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)To navigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, seeOverview 0 141.

Pairing

If equipped, a Bluetooth-enabledcell phone must be paired to theBluetooth system and thenconnected to the vehicle before itcan be used. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar Hands-Free Calling,if available. See OnStar Overview0 339.



Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.Pairing as a MP3 player may notbe available on all vehicles.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.


. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. ThePIN is used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The systemresponds with “<Phone name>

has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

7. Repeat Steps 1-6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different phone, thenew phone must be in the vehicleand available to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone toconnect to and follow the onscreen prompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call Using thePhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufacturer's

user guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press v / > once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the TUNE/MENUbutton to scroll through theentire list of names/numbers inthe phone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:



3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.



Accepting a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” and press the TUNE/MENU knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Decline” and press the TUNE/MENU knob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

If equipped, call waiting must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” and press the TUNE/MENU knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Decline” and press the TUNE/MENU knob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

If equipped, conference calling andthree-way calling must be supportedon the Bluetooth phone and enabledby the wireless service carrierto work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1−4. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Enter Number.




Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition ifequipped, press the b / g button onthe steering wheel. Use thecommands below for the variousvoice features. For additionalinformation, say "Help" while youare in a voice recognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview 0 339.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and an

MP3 player at the same time.Pairing as a MP3 player may notbe available on all vehicles.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.


. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The systemresponds with instructions anda four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want topair. For help with this process,see your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The system



responds with “<Phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store : This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store : This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete : This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags : Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command




2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number orgroup of numbers you want tostore all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow the

directions given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call : The call commandcan be used to call a phone numberor a stored name tag

Digit Dial : This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command




2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Say“Dial” or “Call.”


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”The system dials the lastnumber called from theconnected cell phone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

If equipped, call waiting must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.



. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

If equipped, three-way calling mustbe supported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call commandto dial the number of the thirdparty to be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to connect allcallers together.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”



The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in the

phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone,” “Using the ‘Delete’Command,” and “Using the ‘DeleteAll Name Tags’ Command.”


168 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 168Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Fan Control

2. Air Conditioning


4. Defrost

5. Temperature Control



8. Recirculation

Climate Control Influence on Start/Stop Operation and Fuel Economy

The climate control system isdependent upon other vehiclesystems for heat and power input.Certain climate control settings canlead to higher fuel usage and/orfewer auto stops.

The following are climate controlsettings that use more fuel:


Climate Controls 169

. Comfort air conditioning mode.

. Defrost mode.

. Setting the climate control to thecoldest or hottest temperature.

. High fan speed settings.

To help reduce fuel usage:

. Use eco air conditioning, insteadof the comfort air conditioning.

. Select a temperature setting thatis higher in hot weather andlower in cold weather.

. Turn off the air conditioningwhen it is not needed.

. Only use defrost to clear thewindows.

Temperature Control : Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the driver orpassenger temperature setting.

Fan Control : Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Air Delivery Modes : PressY,\,[ , or- to change the direction ofthe airflow. An indicator light comeson in the selected mode button.

Y (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog) : Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets to clearthe windows of fog or moisture.

0 (Defrost) : Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning) : Press tocycle between the off, comfort, andeco (economy) air conditioningmodes. The indicator will be lit incomfort and eco modes and turnsoff when there is no A/C function.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioner will not run and theindicator light turns off.

For eco a/c, press#. The indicatorwill turn green. This settingbalances fuel economy and airconditioning comfort. In warmweather conditions, auto stops mayoccur more frequently and thevehicle interior may be warmer ascompared to the comfort airconditioning. This setting allowshigher humidity inside the vehicleand window fogging before theengine restarts.

Pressing the0 button during anauto stop will restart the engine toprevent window fogging. To reachcomfort levels quickly during anauto stop, the engine will restart ifthe air conditioner is off and AUTOor# is selected.

For comfort a/c, press# again.The indicator will turn amber.

When the indicator light is on, theair conditioner runs automatically tocool the air inside the vehicle or todry the air needed to defog thewindshield faster.



h (Recirculation) : Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

M or L (Heated Seats, IfEquipped) : Press to turn theheated seats on or off. See HeatedFront Seats 0 54.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors0 43.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Sensors

The solar sensor on top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Air Conditioning


4. Defrost

5. SYNC



8. Fan Control

9. Recirculation

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Climate Control Influence on Stop/Start Operation and Fuel Economy

The climate control system isdependent upon other vehiclesystems for heat and power input.Certain climate control settings canlead to higher fuel usage and/orfewer auto stops.

The following are climate controlsettings that use more fuel:

. Comfort air conditioning mode.

. Defrost mode.

. Extreme temperature settings,such as 15 °C (60 °F) or 32 °C(90 °F).

. High fan speed settings.

To help reduce fuel usage:

. Use the full automatic control asdescribed under “AutomaticOperation.”

. Use eco air conditioning, insteadof the comfort air conditioning.

. Select a temperature setting thatis higher in hot weather andlower in cold weather.

. Turn off the air conditioningwhen it is not needed.

. Only use defrost to clear thewindows.



Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon. Pressh to selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Manual Operation

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC : Press to link all climatezone settings to the driver settings.The SYNC indicator light will turnon. When the passenger settingsare adjusted, the SYNC indicatorlight turns off.

Fan Control : Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes : PressY,\,[ , or- to change the direction ofthe airflow. An indicator light comeson in the selected mode button.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog) : Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets to clearthe windows of fog or moisture.

0 (Defrost) : Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning) : Press tocycle between the off, comfort, andeco (economy) air conditioningmodes. The indicator will be lit incomfort and eco modes and turnsoff when there is no A/C function.



If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioner will not run and theindicator light turns off.

For eco a/c, press#. The indicatorwill turn green. This settingbalances fuel economy and airconditioning comfort. In warmweather conditions, auto stops mayoccur more frequently and thevehicle interior may be warmer ascompared to the comfort airconditioning. This setting allowshigher humidity inside the vehicleand window fogging before theengine restarts.

Pressing the0 button during anauto stop will restart the engine toprevent window fogging. To reachcomfort levels quickly during anauto stop, the engine will restart ifthe air conditioner is off and AUTOor# is selected.

If temperature controls are adjustedcooler by more than 1 °C (1 °F)during an auto stop, the engine willrestart to ensure that comfort isreached.

For comfort a/c, press# again.The indicator will turn amber.

Pressing# again cancelsautomatic air conditioning and turnsoff the air conditioner. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation andthe air conditioner runsautomatically as needed. When theindicator light is on, the airconditioner runs automatically tocool the air inside the vehicle or todry the air needed to defog thewindshield faster.

h (Recirculation) : Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem has a sensor thatautomatically detects high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. The fan speed mayslightly increase to help preventfogging. If the climate control

system does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization0 123.

M or L (Heated Seats, IfEquipped) : Press to turn theheated seats on or off. See HeatedFront Seats 0 54.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors0 43.



Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with theremote start, the climate controlsystem may run when the vehicle isstarted remotely. The system usesthe driver’s previous settings to heator cool the inside of the vehicle. Therear defog may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on during aremote start. The front heated seatswill turn on if it is cold outside. Theheated seat indicator lights do notcome on during a remote start.

Sensors

The solar sensor on top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Air VentsCenter Air Vents

Use the slider knobs on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

Move the slider knobs outward orinward to open or close off theairflow.



Side Air Vents

Use the thumbwheels to change thedirection of the airflow.

Move the vertical thumbwheels upor down to open or close off theairflow.

Operation Tips

. Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the paths under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Do not attach any devices to theair vent louvers. This restrictsairflow and may cause damageto the air vents.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance;see Maintenance Schedule 0 310.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 320.

1. Open the glove box completely.



2. Disconnect the glove box doordampener string from the glovebox door assembly. Pleasenote: a pen or pencil may beinserted through the end of thedampener string to prevent thestring from slipping inside thedoor assembly.

3. Squeeze both sides of theglove box door to open beyondthe stops.

4. Release the retainer clips (1)holding the service door. Openthe service door and removethe old filter (2).

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andretainer clips.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 177

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 179Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 180Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Track Events and CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 181Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 182Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 184Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 188Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 192Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 196Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 198Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 202

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Driver Assistance SystemsRear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . 207Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 217Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224


178 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts0 57.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.



{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Service VehicleMessages 0 121. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.



Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.



The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Track Events andCompetitive DrivingTrack events or competitive drivingmay affect the vehicle warranty. Seethe warranty manual before usingthe vehicle for track testing or othercompetitive driving.

Caution

If the vehicle is used for trackevents and competitive driving,the engine may use more oil thanit would with normal use. Low oillevels can damage the engine.Check the oil level often andmaintain the proper level. SeeEngine Oil 0 231.

Add and keep the oil level at 1 L (1qt) above the high mark whendriving under these conditions. Forinformation on how to check andadd oil, see Engine Oil 0 231.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 261.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).



. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 203.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied sooner

than when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 201.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, useRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 329. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 197.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 203.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shifting

gears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 297.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.



{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the original

equipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 261 and TirePressure 0 268.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It may show the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.



3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to

your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 222 forimportant information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay show the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unlessneeded.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle may have an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the Keyless Accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : Whenthe vehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 195.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages 0 122.



When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to OFF. On vehicleswith an automatic transmission,the shift lever must be inP (Park) to turn the ignitionswitch to the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 201.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowsyou to use some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrun down.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine 0 192. Theignition will then remain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to be



driven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

key. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 195.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe ignition and automatictransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems, and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. Onvehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 201.



{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe ignition. To move the key fromACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,the shift lever must be in P (Park).

2 (ON/RUN) : The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12-volt poweroutlets, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used for

service and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not restart ifthe battery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

3 (START) : This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened when theignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORYand the key is in the ignition. If theignition becomes difficult to turn,see Keys 0 26.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.This system is to prevent ignitionkey removal unless the shift lever isin P (Park).

The key lock release will not work ifthe battery is charged less than9 volts, or uncharged. Try chargingor jump starting the battery. SeeJump Starting - North America0 294.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, there is amanual key lock release. Locate the



hole below the ignition lock. Insert atool or key into the opening. Locatethe lever, and press it toward thedriver while removing the key fromthe ignition.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Any

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

resulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 224.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition to START. When theengine starts, let go of theignition.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Allow the oil towarm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking has

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

ended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START,or press the ENGINE START/STOP button, for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Waitat least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down. When theengine starts, let go of the keyor button, and the accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do



not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Stop/Start System

{ Warning

Exiting the vehicle without firstshifting into P (Park) may causethe vehicle to move. You or othersmay be injured. Because thevehicle has the auto engine stop/start feature, the vehicle's enginemight seem to be shut off;however, once the brake pedal isreleased, the engine will start upagain.

Shift to P (Park) and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF, beforeexiting the vehicle.

The vehicle has a fuel saving stop/start system to shut off the engine tohelp conserve fuel.

Auto Engine Stop/Start

When the brakes are applied andthe vehicle is at a complete stop,the engine may turn off. Whenstopped, the tachometer displaysAUTO STOP. See Tachometer0 103. When the brake pedal isreleased or the accelerator pedalpushed, the engine will restart.

Auto Stop may be deactivated if:

. A minimum vehicle speed is notreached.

. The engine or transmission isnot at the required operatingtemperature.

. The outside temperature is notin the required operating range.Typically below -10 °C (14 °F) orabove 50 °C (122 °F).

. The shift lever is in any gearother than D (Drive).

. The battery has been recentlydisconnected.

. The battery charge is low.

. The interior comfort level has notreached the required level forthe climate control system or

defog settings. Use the eco(green indicator on) airconditioning mode for betterefficiency. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System 0 171.

. The Auto Stop time is greaterthan two minutes.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18 °C (0 °F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.



The electrical cord is on thepassenger side of the enginecompartment, between thefender and the air cleaner.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could make

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts.



The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

. Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work upto 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF.

The power windows and sunroof willwork until any door is opened.

The radio continues to work until thedriver door is opened.

All these features operate when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 201.

2. Move the shift lever intoP (Park) by holding in thebutton on the shift lever andpushing the shift lever all theway toward the front of thevehicle.


4. Remove the key (if equipped)and take it with you. If you canleave the vehicle with theignition key in your hand, thevehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 195.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpushing the button.



If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly, then it is difficult toshift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 219.

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:

. Prevent ignition key removal (ifequipped) unless the shift leveris in P (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 294.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, see your dealer.

Shift Lock Manual Release

If jump starting the vehicle did notwork, the shift lock manual releasemust be used.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Apply the parking brake.



2. Release the shift lever trimfrom the center console at therear, then fold upward and turnit to the left.

3. Insert a tool into the opening asfar as it will go. At the sametime move the shift lever out ofP (Park). If P (Park) is selectedagain, the shift lever will belocked again. Have the causeof the problem fixed by yourdealer.

4. Install the shift lever trim on theconsole.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 195 andEngine Exhaust 0 197.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 219.

AutomaticTransmission

P : This position locks the frontwheels. It is the best position to usewhen you start the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 195.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply thebrake pedal then press the shiftlever button before you can shiftfrom P (Park) while the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park 0 196.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 184.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Accelerating slowly ormaintaining a constant speed,push the accelerator pedal abouthalfway down.



. Accelerating quickly or passing,push the accelerator all theway down.

M : This position allows you tochange gears similar to a manualtransmission. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see Manual Mode 0 200.

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

While driving in manual mode,the transmission will remain inthe driver selected gear. Whencoming to a stop in the manualposition, the vehicle willautomatically shift into1 (First) gear.

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the top of the shiftlever to upshift, or press the −(minus) end of the button todownshift.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)in the instrument cluster will changefrom the currently displayedmessage to the letter “M,” forManual position, and a numberindicating the requested gear.

While using the DSC feature thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. You canuse this for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm):

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next higher gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too low.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too high.

Second Gear Start Feature

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into2 (Second) gear. A higher gearallows you to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

With the DSC feature, the vehiclecan be set to pull away in2 (Second) gear.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode).

2. With the vehicle stopped, pressthe (+) end of the button toselect 2 (Second) gear. Thevehicle will start from a stopposition in 2 (Second) gear.

3. Once moving, select thedesired drive gear.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 109.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to

avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake



To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light 0 108.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency driving

conditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)If equipped, HSA may automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is stoppedon a grade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. During the

transition from releasing the brakepedal to accelerating to drive off ona grade, HSA holds the brakingpressure to prevent rolling. HSA willnot activate if the vehicle is in adrive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the

vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 184and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.



2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

To turn the system off, press theTCS/StabiliTrak button.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak button.The traction off light i displays inthe instrument cluster.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak button.The traction off light i displayed inthe instrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe TCS/StabiliTrak button ispressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton until the traction off light iand StabiliTrak OFF light g comeon and stay on in the instrumentcluster.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button. The traction offlight i and StabiliTrak OFF light gin the instrument cluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 227.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With the Traction Control System(TCS) or StabiliTrak system, thesystem may begin to limit wheelspin while you are using cruisecontrol. If this happens, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 203. If a collisionalert occurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 211. Whenroad conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, cruise control can beturned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

1 (On/Off) : Press to turn thecruise control on or off. A whiteindicator comes on in the instrumentcluster when cruise is turned on.

* (Cancel) : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate) : Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press the control up briefly toresume to that speed or hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast) : Press thecontrol down briefly to set the speedand activate cruise control. If cruisecontrol is already active, use todecrease speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If the 1 button is on when not inuse, SET/− or RES/+ could getbumped and the vehicle could gointo cruise when not desired. Keepthe 1 button off when cruise is notbeing used.

1. Press 1 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.



3. Move the control toward SET/−and release it.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 102.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, pressRES/+ up briefly and then release it.The vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold RES/+ up untilthe vehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase the speed in smallincrements, press RES/+ upbriefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 102.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET/− down untilthe desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, press SET/−down briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 102.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previouslyset cruise control speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– down will result incruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. When going downhill, youmight have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep your speeddown. If the brake pedal is applied,cruise control will disengage.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:



. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off the cruise control,press 1.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 1 is pressedor if the vehicle is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have an RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

The RVC system can assist thedriver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

How the System Works

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the image of the areabehind the vehicle appears in theradio screen. The previous screendisplays when the vehicle is shiftedout of R (Reverse) afterapproximately 10 seconds.

To see the previous screen sooner,do one of the following:

. Press a button on theinfotainment system.

. Shift into P (Park).

. Reach a vehicle speed of8 km/h (5 mph).

Press MENU to adjust the displaybrightness while viewing the rearcamera display.



Symbols and Guidelines

The system may have a feature thatlets the driver view caution symbolson the infotainment screen whileusing the RVC. The Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.The error message Rear ParkingAssist Symbols Unavailable maydisplay if RPA has been disabledand the symbols have beenturned on.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing theinfotainment screen when an objectis detected by the RPA system.

The RVC system may have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the symbols and guidelineson or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the CONFIG button onthe infotainment system.

3. Select Display Settings andthen Rear Camera Options.

4. Select Symbols or Guidelines.When a checkmark appearsnext to the option, the featureis on.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

On vehicles with the RCTA, whenshifted into R (Reverse), a warningtriangle with a left or right pointingarrow may display on the RVCscreen to warn of traffic coming fromthe left or the right. Three beeps willalso sound from the left or rightside, depending on the approachingcross traffic direction. This systemdetects objects coming from up to20 m (65 ft) from the left or right sidebehind the vehicle. The RCTAsystem will not work properly if ice,snow, mud, or anything else buildsup on the rear bumper sensors.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of your vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

To turn RCTA on or off, see“Collision Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 123.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM : If this message appearsin the center stack display, thesystem may need service.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The RVC is above the license plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending on



vehicle orientation or roadconditions. Displayed images maybe farther or closer than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsehas built up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle was inan accident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Parking AssistIf equipped, the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system assists the driver withparking and avoiding objects whilein R (Reverse). RPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground. Thedistance objects can be detectedmay be less during warmer or humidweather.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objects

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

below the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with parking assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.


RPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

An obstacle detection is indicatedby beeps. The time between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in), the beeping is acontinuous beep for five seconds.

Turning the System On and Off

The RPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization 0 123.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

RPA defaults to the on setting eachtime the vehicle is started.

Turn off RPA when towing a trailer.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST : Ifthis message occurs, check thefollowing conditions:

. The sensors are not clean. Keepthe vehicle's rear bumper free ofmud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.For cleaning instructions, seeExterior Care 0 299.

. The parking assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF : If the RPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:

. The driver has disabled thesystem.

. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed,RPA will return to normaloperation.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.



. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield, and rapidlybeeps. FCA also lights an ambervisual alert if following anothervehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving 0 178.

FCA can be disabled with the FCAsteering wheel control.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator will

display green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.



Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front. When this Collision Alertoccurs, the brake system mayprepare for driver braking to occurmore rapidly which can cause abrief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates. Cruise controlmay be disengaged when theCollision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a detected vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to far, medium, near,or off. The first button press showsthe current control setting on theDIC. Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the farther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alert

timing. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts to turning vehicles, vehicles inother lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front ofthe camera sensor may correct theissue

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas. TheSBZA warning display will light up in



the corresponding outside sidemirror and will flash if the turn signalis on.

{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back5 m (16 ft).


The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone. This indicates it may be

unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check theSBZA display, check mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthat blind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.

SBZA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See“Collision Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 123.



If SBZA is disabled by the driver,the SBZA mirror displays will notlight up.


SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The SBZA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. SBZA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care0 299. If the DIC displays thesystem unavailable message aftercleaning both sides of the vehicletoward the rear corners of thevehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

Radio Frequency Information


Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide an alert ifthe vehicle is crossing a lanewithout using a turn signal in thatdirection. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markingsat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater.

{ Warning

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle. The LDW systemmay not:

. Provide enough time toavoid a crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice; if they are

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

not in proper condition; or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarking. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LDW inbad weather conditions.


The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack, forward of the shiftlever. The control indicator will lightwhen LDW is on.

When LDW is on, @ is green ifLDW is available to warn of a lanedeparture. If the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking without usingthe turn signal in that direction, @changes to amber and flashes.Additionally, there will be threebeeps on the right or left, dependingon the lane departure direction.


The system may not detect lanes aswell when there are:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

If the LDW system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LDW alerts may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LDW off if theseconditions continue.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with an

octane rating below 87, as it maycause engine damage and will lowerfuel economy.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels that



meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 107.If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If itis determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any other

fuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 216.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop then unscrew thecap all the way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

Turn the fuel cap counterclockwiseto remove. While refueling, hang thefuel cap from the hook on the fueldoor. Reinstall the cap by turning itclockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the malfunction indicator lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 107.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Do not top off or overfill the tank andwait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 299.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 107.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 297. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 297.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.



. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode 0 200. Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 197.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has

electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.



Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees, or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, the

brakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 239.



Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parkingbrake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule 0 310.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 239.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, threeimportant considerations have to dowith weight:

. Weight of the trailer.

. Weight of the trailer tongue.

. Total weight on your vehicle'stires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that canbe too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, and



how much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”following.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices0 327.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the people

who will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 184.

The trailer tongue (1) should weigh10% of the total loaded trailerweight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 184. Make sure not to go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.

. The rear bumper on the vehicleis not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.



. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust 0 197.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well orat all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light)0 107. A device connected to theData Link Connector (DLC)—such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device—may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.



Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 73 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 74.


226 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 227California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 227

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 233Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 234Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 239Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Battery - North America . . . . . . 242Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 244

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 244

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 245

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (LS and LT) . . . . . . . . . . 250

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 252Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Electrical System Overload . . . 254Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 263Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276


Vehicle Care 227

Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 279Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 293

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 297Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningWARNING: Most motor vehicles,including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals.

See Battery - North America 0 242and Jump Starting - North America0 294.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as


228 Vehicle Care

airbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 74.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 334.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 73.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 321.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It isinside the vehicle to the left ofthe steering column.


Vehicle Care 229

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary releasehandle. The handle is underthe front edge of the hood nearthe center. Push the handle tothe right and at the same timeraise the hood.

3. After the hood is slightly lifted,it will continue to open to thefull position. Before closing thehood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Lower thehood until the lifting force of thestrut is reduced, then releasethe hood to latch fully. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


230 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview


Vehicle Care 231

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 234.

2. Engine Oil Fill Cap. SeeEngine Oil 0 231.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. SeeEngine Oil 0 231.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 235.

5. Automatic Transmission FluidFill Cap. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid 0 234.

6. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes 0 241.

7. Battery - North America 0 242.

8. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant 0 236.

9. Positive (+) Battery Terminal(Under Cover). See JumpStarting - North America 0 294.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 255.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid0 240.

12. Negative (-) Battery Terminal.See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 294.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Always use engine oil approvedto the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 233.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overview0 230 for the location of the engineoil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


232 Vehicle Care

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in allthe way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 323.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the proper operatingrange, the engine could bedamaged. You should drain outthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 230 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 319.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 233

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil. SAE 0W-20 may be usedas an alternative.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, alwaysselect an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 118.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system must


234 Vehicle Care

be reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enterthe Vehicle Information Menu.Use the thumbwheel to scroll

through the menu items untilyou reach REMAININGOIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.


The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off and the REMAININGOIL LIFE 100% message isdisplayed.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 310, and be sure to use the fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 319.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 230.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule0 310.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine air


Vehicle Care 235

cleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Electrical Connector2. Air Duct Clamp3. Screws

1. Disconnect the harnessconnector from the air cleanercover electrical connector (1).

2. Loosen the screw on the airduct clamp (2) holding the airoutlet duct in place. Do notremove the clamp. Move theair duct aside.

3. Remove the air cleanerhousing cover screws (3).

4. Raise the air cleaner housingcover and remove the aircleaner/filter from the aircleaner housing.

5. Clean the filter sealing surfaceand the housing.

6. Install the new engine aircleaner/filter.

7. Lower the air cleaner housingcover and secure with thescrews (3).

8. Install the air duct and tightenthe screw on the air ductclamp (2) to secure it to the aircleaner housing.

9. Install the harness electricalconnector (1).

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.


236 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant mixture. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 319 andMaintenance Schedule 0 310.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 239.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The engine

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 237

Warning (Continued)

could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.

This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 319.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol

(Continued)


238 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

The coolant surge tank pressurecap can be removed when thecooling system, including the surgetank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the markpointed to on the front of thecoolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tankcap off, start the engine and letit run until the upper radiatorhose starts getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches themark pointed to on the front ofthe coolant surge tank.


Vehicle Care 239

5. Replace the cap tightly.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument cluster to warn of engineoverheating. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 104.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. Contactyour dealer for additionalinformation.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fans

should be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.


240 Vehicle Care

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safedistance from the vehicle in front.If the warning does not come backon, continue to drive normally andhave the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 230 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion if

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 241

Caution (Continued)

freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 323.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 230 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:


242 Vehicle Care

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 108.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 310.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 319.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

This vehicle has a standard 12-voltbattery under the hood. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 230.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new 12-volt battery isneeded. The vehicle has anAbsorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt


Vehicle Care 243

battery. Installation of a standard12-volt battery will result in reduced12-volt battery life.

When using a 12-volt batterycharger on the 12-volt AGM battery,some chargers have an AGMbattery setting on the charger.If available, use the AGM setting onthe charger, to limit charge voltageto 14.8 volts.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 227.

Stop/Start System

The vehicle has a stop/start systemto shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. See Starting theEngine 0 192.

There is an auxiliary battery behindthe access panel in the left rear ofthe trunk. This battery is formanaging the stop/start auxiliaryloads and is not to be used for anyother purpose. See your dealer ifthe auxiliary battery needs service.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 294 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the12-volt battery black, negative (−)cable from the battery to keep thebattery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the12-volt battery black, negative (−)cable from the battery or use abattery trickle charger.

Remember to reconnect the batterywhen ready to drive the vehicle.


244 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a key type ignition,while parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins to

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 245

Warning (Continued)

roll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

It is a good idea to clean the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis.When worn, or when cleaning isineffective, replace the wiper blade.For proper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 320.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in themiddle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.


246 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs0 253.

For any bulb-changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ Warning

The high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a veryhigh voltage. If you try to serviceany of the system components,you could be seriously injured.Have your dealer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

The vehicle may have HIDheadlamps. After an HID headlampbulb has been replaced, you maynotice that the beam is a slightlydifferent shade than it was originally.This is normal.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 247

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

Base Headlamp Assembly

The base model vehicle hashalogen high-beam and low-beamheadlamps, a parking lamp, asidemarker lamp, and two turnsignal lamps on the headlampassembly.

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. High-Beam Headlamp2. Low-Beam Headlamp

3. Sidemarker Lamp4. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

To replace one of the headlampbulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood0 228.

2. For the driver side bulb,remove the windshield washerbottle filler neck by firmlypulling it straight up and out ofthe bottle.

3. Remove the cap from the backof the headlamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

5. Remove the bulb from the lampassembly by turningcounterclockwise.

6. Install a new bulb in the lampassembly.

7. Connect the electricalconnector.

8. Replace the cap from the backof the headlamp assembly byturning it clockwise.

9. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing itstraight into the bottle. Ensurethat the filler neck clip engagesinto the underhood electricalcenter retainer.

Uplevel Headlamp Assembly

The uplevel model vehicle hashalogen high-beam and low-beamheadlamps, a parking lamp, asidemarker lamp, and two turnsignal lamps on the headlampassembly.


1. High-Beam Headlamp2. Turn Signal Lamps


248 Vehicle Care

3. Low-Beam Headlamp4. Parking Lamp5. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

High-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood0 228.



4. Disconnect the electricalconnector (1).

5. Disengage the spring clip (2)from the bulb by pressing downon the end and then swingupward.

6. Remove the bulb from the lampassembly.


8. Install the spring clip (2).

9. Connect the electricalconnector (1).



Low-Beam Headlamp



3. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

4. Remove the bulb from the lampassembly by turningcounterclockwise.


6. Connect the electricalconnector.


8. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing itstraight into the bottle. Ensure


Vehicle Care 249

that the filler neck clip engagesinto the underhood electricalcenter retainer.

HID Headlamp Assembly

The HID assembly has a highintensity discharge (HID) high/lowbeam, a DRL/parking lamp,sidemarker lamp, and a turn signallamp on the headlamp assembly.

For replacement of the headlamp onan HID assembly, contact yourdealer. See High IntensityDischarge (HID) Lighting 0 246.


1. Turn Signal Lamp2. DRL/Parking Lamp3. Sidemarker Lamp

Front Turn Signal, Parking, andSidemarker Lamps

To replace one of these lamps on abase, uplevel, or HID assembly:


2. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from thesocket.

4. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly by turningit clockwise.


Fog LampsTo replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Remove the five access panelfasteners under the frontfascia.

2. Lower the panel far enough toaccess the fog lamp bulb.


250 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

4. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lampbulb assembly.

5. Install the new bulb by turningit clockwise into the assembly.

6. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (LS and LT)

1. Back-Up Lamp2. Taillamp

Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamp andBack-Up Lamp

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk0 38.

2. Remove the push pins and pullback the trunk deck trim.

3. Remove the bulb socket byturning counterclockwise andpulling straight out.


5. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

6. Install the bulb socket byturning clockwise.

7. Install the trunk deck trim.

1. Stoplamp/Taillamp2. Turn Signal Lamp


Vehicle Care 251

Caution

Improper lamp assembly removaland installation can cause leaksand water intrusion which maycause damage to the taillamp. Donot remove the taillamp assemblyto replace a bulb. Use the trunkopening to access the bulb.

To replace any one of these bulbs:

Stoplamp/Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp


2. Remove the push pins and pullthe trunk trim away from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Remove the bulb socket fromthe taillamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by turning the bulbcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and pulling it straight out.

5. Install a new bulb into thesocket.

6. Install the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

7. Install the trunk trim andpush pins.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (LTZ)The trunk deck inboard taillamp isan LED. To replace the taillamp seeyour dealer.

Back-Up Lamp


2. Remove the push pins and pullback the trunk deck trim.

3. Remove the bulb socket byturning counterclockwise andpulling straight out.


5. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

6. Install the bulb socket byturning clockwise.

7. Install the trunk deck trim.


252 Vehicle Care

Caution

Improper lamp assembly removaland installation can cause leaksand water intrusion which maycause damage to the taillamp. Donot remove the taillamp assemblyto replace a bulb. Use the trunkopening to access the bulb.

The stoplamp/taillamp is an LED. Toreplace the stoplamp/taillamp seeyour dealer.

Turn Signal Lamp


2. Remove the push pins and pullthe trunk trim away from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Remove the bulb socket fromthe taillamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by turning the bulbcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and pulling it straight out.

5. Install a new bulb into thesocket.

6. Install the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

7. Install the trunk trim andpush pins.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:


1. Push the release tab towardthe lamp assembly.

2. Pull the lamp assembly downto remove.


Vehicle Care 253

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socketand turn the bulb socketclockwise to install it into thelamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the releasetab locks into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921 LL

Deck Lid Taillamp 194

DRL and ParkingLamp (HID)

7443 ULL

Front Fog Lamp H10

Front Parking Lamp(Uplevel)

7443

FrontSidemarker Lamp

W5WLL

Front Turn SignalLamp (Base andUplevel)

7444NA

Front Turn SignalLamp (HID)

7443 NA

High-BeamHeadlamp (Base)

9005 LL

High-BeamHeadlamp (Uplevel)

H7 LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Low-BeamHeadlamp (Baseand Uplevel)

H11 LL

Stoplamp/Taillamp(LS and LT)

7440

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

7443 NA

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


254 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ Warning

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltagecomponents in the vehicle canonly be serviced by technicianswith special training.

High voltage components areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these components.High voltage cable or wiring hasorange covering or labels. Do notprobe, tamper with, cut, or modifyhigh voltage cable or wiring.

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.


Vehicle Care 255

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block 0 255 andInstrument Panel Fuse Block 0 259.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis on the driver side of the enginecompartment, near the battery.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


256 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 257

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

MiniFuses

Usage

1 Transmission ControlModule Battery

2 Engine ControlModule Battery (LTG)/Air ConditioningCompressorClutch (LKW)

3 Air ConditioningCompressorClutch (LTG)

4 Air ConditioningCompressorClutch (LTG)

5 Engine ControlModule Battery (LKW)

7 Engine ControlModule Ignition (LKW)

8 Spare

9 Ignition Coils

10 Engine ControlModule

MiniFuses

Usage

11 Emissions

13 Transmission ModuleIgnition

14 Cabin HeaterCoolant Pump

15 Spare

16 Aero Shutter

17 Spare

18 R/C Dual BatteryIsolator Module

20 TransmissionAuxiliary OilPump (LKW)

23 Spare (LKW)

29 Left Seat PowerLumber Control

30 Right Seat PowerLumber Control

31 Chassis ControlModule

32 Back-Up Lamps/Interior Lamps

MiniFuses

Usage

33 Front Heated Seats

34 Antilock BrakeSystem Valve

35 Amplifier

37 Right High Beam

38 Left High Beam

46 Cooling Fan

47 Emissions

48 Foglamp

49 Low Beam HIDHeadlamp Right

50 Low Beam HIDHeadlamp Left

51 Horn/Dual Horn

52 Cluster Ignition

53 Inside RearviewMirror/Rear Camera/Fuel Module Ignition

54 Heating, Ventilation,and Air ConditioningModule Ignition


258 Vehicle Care

MiniFuses

Usage

55 Front PowerWindows/Mirrors

56 Windshield Washer

57 Spare

60 Heated Mirror

62 Canister VentSolenoid

66 Spare

67 Fuel Module

69 Battery VoltageSensor

70 Lane Departure/RearParking Aid/SideBlind Zone Assist

71 PEPS BATT

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Front Wiper

12 Starter 1

21 Rear Power Window

J-CaseFuses

Usage

22 Sunroof

24 Front Power Window

25 PEPS MTR

26 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27 Not Used

28 Rear Defogger

41 Brake Vacuum Pump

42 Cooling Fan K2

44 Starter 2

45 Cooling Fan K1

59 Air Pump Emissions

MiniRelays

Usage

7 Powertrain

9 Cooling Fan K2

13 Cooling Fan K1

15 Run/Crank

16 Spare

MiniRelays

Usage

17 Window/MirrorDefogger

MicroRelays

Usage

1 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

2 Starter Solenoid

4 Front Wiper Speed

5 Front Wiper On

6 Spare

8 TransmissionAuxiliary OilPump (LKW)

10 Cooling Fan K3

11 Starter 2Solenoid (LKW)

14 Headlamp LowBeam/DRL


Vehicle Care 259

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block isin the instrument panel, on thedriver side of the vehicle. To accessthe fuses, open the fuse panel doorby pulling down at the top.

Press in on the sides of the door torelease it from the instrument panel.

Pull the door toward you to releaseit from the hinge.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Steering WheelControls Backlight

2 Right Rear TurnSignal, Left MirrorTurn Signal, LeftFront Turn Signal,Door Locks

3 Left Stoplamp, LeftDRL Lamp,Headlamp Control,Right Taillamp, Right


260 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

Park/SidemarkerLamps, Right MirrorTurn, Right FrontTurn Signals

4 Radio

5 OnStar (If Equipped)

6 Front AccessoryPower Outlet

7 Console Bin PowerOutlet

8 License Plate Lamp,CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp, Rear FogLamps, Right FrontPark/SidemarkerLamps, LEDIndicator Dim,Washer Pump, RightStoplamp, TrunkRelease

9 Left Low-BeamHeadlamp, DRL

Fuses Usage

10 Body ControlModule 8 (J-CaseFuse), Power Locks

11 Front HeaterVentilation AirConditioning/Blower(J-Case Fuse)

12 Passenger Seat(Circuit Breaker)

13 Driver Seat (CircuitBreaker)

14 Diagnostic LinkConnector

15 Airbag, SDM

16 Trunk Release

17 Heater VentilationAir ConditioningController

18 Audio Main

19 Displays

20 PassengerOccupant Sensor

21 Instrument Cluster

Fuses Usage

22 Ignition Switch

23 Right Low-BeamHeadlamp, DRL

24 Ambient Light,Switch Backlighting(LED), Trunk Lamp,Shift Lock, KeyCapture

25 110V AC

26 Spare

Relays Usage

K1 Trunk Release

K2 Not Used

K3 Power Outlet Relay


Vehicle Care 261

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 184.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation 0 269 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.


262 Vehicle Care

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 262.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increased

traction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 276.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If winter

tires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. It is recommendedthat winter tires be installed on thevehicle if frequent driving attemperatures below approximately5 °C (40 °F) or on ice or snowcovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires 0 262.

Caution

High performance summer tireshave rubber compounds that loseflexibility and may developsurface cracks in the tread areaat temperatures below −7 °C

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 263

Caution (Continued)

(20 °F). Always store highperformance summer tiresindoors and at temperaturesabove −7 °C (20 °F) when not inuse. If the tires have beensubjected to −7 °C (20 °F) or less,let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5 °C (40 °F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated airdirectly on the tires. Alwaysinspect tires before use. See TireInspection 0 274.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size : The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the


264 Vehicle Care

manufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading 0 278.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only : Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire 0 293 and If a Tire GoesFlat 0 281.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation : Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure0 268.

(6) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,


Vehicle Care 265

construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of


266 Vehicle Care

the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 268.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 184.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 184.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 184.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 267

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 184.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire that

contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 268 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 184.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 275.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are


268 Vehicle Care

determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 278.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 184.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 184.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 184.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


Vehicle Care 269

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire 0 293.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, no

further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.This could cause a crash, andyou or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

Vehicles with P235/50R18 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to270 kPa (39 psi).

Vehicles with P245/40R19 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving the vehicle at speeds


270 Vehicle Care

of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to310 kPa (45 psi).

Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended. See Vehicle Load Limits0 184 and Tire Pressure 0 268.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or


Vehicle Care 271

alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 271.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiver inthe vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 184.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 113.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 184, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 268.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 274, Tire Rotation 0 274 and Tires0 261.


272 Vehicle Care

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 282 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes for

about one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 276.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.


Vehicle Care 273

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off or place thevehicle power mode in ON/RUN/START. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access)0 188 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) 0 190.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menuin the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message asking if theprocess should begin shouldappear.

6. Press the SET/CLR buttonagain to confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.


274 Vehicle Care

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFor press STOP to turn theignition off.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 310.

Tires are rotated to achieve amore uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 275 and WheelReplacement 0 279.


Vehicle Care 275

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 268 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 184.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 271.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 323.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

off and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection 0 274 and Tire Rotation0 274.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. The


276 Vehicle Care

tire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number

will be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 263.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 274. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the winter


Vehicle Care 277

tires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 270.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 184.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if

(Continued)


278 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

tires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 276 andAccessories and Modifications0 227.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of

most passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 279

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.


280 Vehicle Care

Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.


Vehicle Care 281

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 261. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if there is ever a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 135.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

(Continued)


282 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing 0 288. Touse the tire sealant and compressorkit, see Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 282.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust may

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

enter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust 0 197.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.


Vehicle Care 283

{ Warning

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tire

sealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 329.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. On/Off Button2. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air

or Air Only)3. Pressure Relief Button4. Pressure Gauge5. Air Only Hose (Black)6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)7. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe compressor.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.


284 Vehicle Care

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 135.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 281 forother important safety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 288.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (7).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stemis positioned close to theground so the hose willreach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (7) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (2)clockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.

9. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (4) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushesthe sealant into the tire. Oncethe sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, thepressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressure


Vehicle Care 285

gauge (4). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure 0 268.

The pressure gauge (4) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 329.

11. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12–18 must bedone immediately afterStep 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (7) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Return the sealant/air hose (6)and the power plug (7) back intheir original locations.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location. Do notexceed the speed on this labeluntil the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”


286 Vehicle Care

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 329.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, use thecompressor kit to inflate the tireto the recommended inflationpressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister and sealant/air hose(6) assembly at a local dealeror in accordance with localstate codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take the

vehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 135.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 281 forother important safety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 288.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (5)and the power plug (7).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stemis positioned close to theground so the hose willreach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stemcap from the flat tire by turningit counterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (5)onto the tire valve stem byturning it clockwise until it istight.

6. Plug the power plug (7) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.


Vehicle Care 287

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (2)counterclockwise to the AirOnly position.

9. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (4). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure 0 268.

The pressure gauge (4) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached. If the tire is inflatedhigher than the recommendedpressure, press the pressurerelief button (3), if equipped,until the proper pressurereading is reached. This optionis only functional when usingthe air only hose (5).

11. Press the on/off button (1) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (7) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (5) from the tire valvestem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (5)and the power plug (7) back totheir original locations.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.


288 Vehicle Care

2. Unscrew the connector (2) fromthe canister (1).

3. Pull up on the canister (1) toremove it.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

6. Screw the connector (2) to thecanister (1).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitTo access the tire sealant andcompressor kit:


2. Lift the cover.

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you need is locatedin the trunk.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire.

4. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.


Vehicle Care 289

1. Screwdriver (If Equipped)2. Wrench3. Tow Hook (If Equipped)4. Fastener (If Equipped)5. Jack6. Trim Removal (If Equipped)

The jack and tools are stored belowthe spare tire.

Place the tools next to the tire beingchanged.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 281 for more information.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nut caps.

If needed, finish looseningthem by hand. The nut capswill not come off of the wheelcover.

The edge of the wheel covercould be sharp, so do not try toremove the cover with yourbare hands. Do not drop thecap or lay it face down, as itcould become scratched ordamaged.

Store the wheel cover in thetrunk until you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allof the wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.


290 Vehicle Care

4. Position the jack head, asshown.

Set the jack to the necessaryheight before positioning itbelow the jacking point.

5. Attach the jack lift assist tool tothe jack by fitting both ends ofthe jack and tool over oneanother.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

training. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

6. Turn the jack handle clockwiseto raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground for the compactspare to fit under the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 291

7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

8. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

9. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

10. Install the compact spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

11. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Turneach nut clockwise by handuntil the wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torque

(Continued)


292 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

specification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 323 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 323 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

14. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to remove thefastener.


Vehicle Care 293

2. Replace the fastener with theone provided in the foam.

Use the longer fastener tostore the flat tire.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise totighten the fastener.

4. Replace the foam, jack andtools, and the tire in theiroriginal storage location.

5. Place the tire, lying flat, facingup in the spare tire well.

6. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseto secure the tire.

7. Place the floor cover on thewheel.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tire

repaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.


294 Vehicle Care

Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 242.

If the battery has run down, youmay want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use thefollowing steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 227.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.


Vehicle Care 295

The vehicle has a battery cover thatmust be removed to gain access tothe battery for jump starting.

1. Clips2. Pivot Points

To remove the battery cover:

1. Release the two rear clips (1).

2. Lift the battery cover up towardthe front of the vehicle torelease it from the pivotpoints (2) and remove.

3. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the battery cover.

The vehicle has a remotepositive (+) terminal under a trimcover. It is under the battery coveron the driver side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 230. Youshould always use this remotepositive (+) terminal.

The jump start negative groundingpoint for the discharged battery isthe engine block or an enginemounting bolt. Connect to a spot asfar away from the dischargedbattery as possible.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles sothat they are not touching.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startingprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would not

(Continued)


296 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand switch off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

4. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the remote positive (+)terminal of the dischargedbattery.

5. Connect the other end of thepositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the

good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

6. Connect one end of the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery.

7. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point forthe discharged battery.

8. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine atidle speed for at leastfour minutes.

9. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not be

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 297

Caution (Continued)

covered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a wheellift tow truck. A flatbed car carriercould damage the vehicle. Thewheel lift tow truck must raise therear of the vehicle and wheel dolliesmust be used to lift the front wheelsoff the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far will the vehicle betowed? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.


298 Vehicle Care

. Does the vehicle have theproper towing equipment? Seeyour dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Vehicles equipped with an activeshutter system cannot be dinghytowed without the tow equipmentdamaging the vehicle. See “DollyTowing” following for the correct wayto tow a vehicle with an activeshutter system.

To dinghy tow the vehicle from thefront with all four wheels on theground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

3. Place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY position. SeeIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 188 or IgnitionPositions (Key Access) 0 190.

4. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuses 8,

22 (Key Access only), and 24,from the instrument panel fuseblock. See Instrument PanelFuse Block 0 259.

Remember to reinstall the fusesonce the destination has beenreached.

Caution

If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it couldbe damaged. Never exceed105 km/h (65 mph) while towingthe vehicle.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.


Vehicle Care 299

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly.

To tow the vehicle with two wheelson the ground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

3. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 319.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


300 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be powerwashed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Wash

the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


Vehicle Care 301

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.


302 Vehicle Care

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help increasefuel economy. Keep the shuttersystem clean for proper operation.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 319.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after driving

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 303

Caution (Continued)

on roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and falluse plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.


304 Vehicle Care

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.


Vehicle Care 305

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.


306 Vehicle Care

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 307

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

If equipped, pull up on the rear ofthe floor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.


308 Vehicle Care

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 309

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 309

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 310

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 321

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oil

changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more


310 Service and Maintenance

frequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 184.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 216.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 228.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 231.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 268.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 274.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 240.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once



a year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 233.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 274.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 231 and Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 233.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant 0 236.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 240.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 299. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 245.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 268.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 274.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 234.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 299.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care 0 299.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 62.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 299.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 244.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 244.

. Check ignition transmission lock(If equipped with a key typeignition). See IgnitionTransmission Lock Check 0 244.



. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 244.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 282.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 46.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 235.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.

Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 235.



(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 299.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 319 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. For

information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 304 andExterior Care 0 299.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil 0 231.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant 0 236.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 CategoryLB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.5L L4 Engine 20972654 A3174C

Engine Oil Filter

2.5L L4 Engine 12640445 PF64

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181

Spark Plugs

2.5L L4 Engine 12627160 41-115

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 92231676 —

Passenger Side – 47.5 cm (18.7 in) 22846938 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


322 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 324

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 323 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in either the glove box orthe trunk area, has the followinginformation:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


Technical Data 323

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.5L L4 Engine 7.4 L 7.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.5L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Base model 62.8 L 16.6 gal

LT or LTZ model 70.0 L 18.5 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


324 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.5L L4 Engine A Automatic 0.95–1.1 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing


Customer Information 325

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 328

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 328GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 332Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 337OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 338

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


326 Customer Information

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Limited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800



Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information) :Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information) :View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar VehicleDiagnostic Information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I (Service History) : View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation) : Select a preferreddealer and view locations, maps,phone numbers, and hours.

r (Warranty TrackingInformation) : Track your vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information) : Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 322.

H (Other Account Information) :View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation (if equipped).

F (Live Chat Support) : Chat withonline help representatives.

See my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatured Articles and Auto CareSections.

. Download owner manuals.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of yourlocation.

. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle’s powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.



. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses may

be reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 805 km (500mi).

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. If available,diesel fuel delivery may be

restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for



parts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle



Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not

specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 329.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.



If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 68.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehicle

repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information(US and Canada Only)

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 343.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


OnStar 339

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. OnStar requires thevehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Terms &

Conditions and Privacy Statementfor more details including systemlimitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.


340 OnStar

. Obtain the Wi-Fi® hotspot nameor SSID and password,if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyOnStar Emergency Services requirea specific OnStar subscription plan.With Automatic Crash Response, inmany crashes, built-in sensors canautomatically alert a speciallytrained OnStar Advisor who isimmediately connected to thevehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being started.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.


OnStar 341

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Destination Download

Subscribers can have directionssent to the vehicle’s navigationscreen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, press the Go buttonon the navigation screen to begindriving directions. Routes that aresent to the navigation screen canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press=, wait forthe prompt, then say “Wi-Fisettings.” On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi Settings on thescreen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type


342 OnStar

(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, BlackBerry®,or Windows® mobile devices.OnStar Subscribers can access thefollowing services from a mobiledevice:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send directions to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

For OnStar RemoteLink informationand compatibility, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can providesavings offers from restaurants andretailers on your route, help locatehotels, or book a room.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.


OnStar 343

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsOnStar Advanced Diagnostics canperform a check of the vehicle's keyoperating systems through amonthly diagnostics report, throughreal time alerts or by pressingQ.OnStar can also monitor tirepressure, if equipped with a TirePressure Monitor System.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Services,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


344 OnStar

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpSubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five dayswithout an ignition cycle. If the


OnStar 345

vehicle has not been started forfive days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 224. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacy


346 OnStar

statement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


OnStar 347

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of


348 OnStar

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


Index 349

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 224Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 234Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Passenger Sensing System . . . .69What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .65

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 105Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 212

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147AntennaBackglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 201Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

ArmrestRear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

AudioTheft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 141


350 Index

Audio PlayersCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

BBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150BatteryLoad Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Battery - North America . . . .242, 294Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 245BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 158, 162

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . . 108

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Brakes (cont'd)Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 188Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 249Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 252Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . 250, 251

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 216

California (cont'd)Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .227, 242, 294

CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . 95Center Stack Display . . . . . . . . . . . 113Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 106CheckIgnition Transmission Lock . . . 244Malfunction IndicatorEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107


Index 351

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .77Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 91Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 168Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 332Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 293CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . 282ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Engine Temperature Gauge . . 104

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 328Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 334

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 332Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 337Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

DisplayCenter Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 324Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


352 Index

Driving (cont'd)Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .24Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 182If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 184Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 180Track Events andCompetitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 184Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 230Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Cooling System Messages . . . .118Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 198Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 337Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 133Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 133

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 135Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 234Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . 136, 249

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24


Index 353

Fuel (cont'd)Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . .112Requirements, California . . . . . 216System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 129Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 309Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 135Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . .112High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 133Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . .113

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 168High Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 112High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 269Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 182Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 202Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . .188, 190Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . 6


354 Index

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 43Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 119Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .28

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 263LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 134Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 107Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Lamps (cont'd)Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 136LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 108Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .111Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Lights (cont'd)Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 133Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . 109Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 104Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . .110

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 112Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51


Index 355

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 310Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 107Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . .118Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Object Detection System . . . . . 120Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . 121Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Messages (cont'd)Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 43Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 188

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 233Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 75Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 328OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 341OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 343OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 340OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340OperationInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 143

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 334


356 Index

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 244

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 197Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 69Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 227

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 158, 162

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Power (cont'd)Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 195Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 61PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 336

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 331

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 242, 294

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 335Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 207Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 297Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 75Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 336General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121


Index 357

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 324Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .63Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .61

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 336General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 331

Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .51Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .51Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 89, 91SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 168Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 228Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 321Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 322

Service (cont'd)Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 331Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 212Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Special Application Services . . . . 316Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 34Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 244


358 Index

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . 250, 251

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 94Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 338

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . 250, 251

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 328Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 41Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Pressure Monitor Operation . . 271Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 270Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Terminology and Definitions . . 265Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Tires (cont'd)Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 279When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 219Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223General Information . . . . . . . . . . 219Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 297Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Track Events andCompetitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 181

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122


Index 359

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . 250, 251

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 278Universal Remote System . . . . . . 129Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Identification Number (VIN) . . . 322Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . 122Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Vehicle (cont'd)Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 288

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Voltage Devices and Wiring . . . . 254

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 108Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 214

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 279Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 81Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 245Wiring, High Voltage Devices . . . 254

2k16 cs6 chevrolet malibu limited 23179986a.ai 1 6/25/2015

Documents